Onkyo Av Receiver Tx Nr818 Users Manual

Onkyo-Tx-Nr818-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-tx-nr818-owner-s-manual

AV Receiver TX-NR818 Manual_TX-NR818_English

TX-NR818 to the manual c3a2c9fb-6e65-4708-8261-f42e3b644448

2015-01-24

: Onkyo Onkyo-Av-Receiver-Tx-Nr818-Users-Manual-233454 onkyo-av-receiver-tx-nr818-users-manual-233454 onkyo pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 156 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Safety Information and Introduction
Connections
- Connecting the AV Receiver
Turning On & Basic Operations
Advanced Operations
- On-screen Setup
- Multi Zone
Controlling Other Components
- iPod/iPhone Playback via Onkyo Dock
  - Using the Onkyo Dock
  - Controlling Your iPod/iPhone
- Controlling Other Components
Appendix
Internet Radio Guide
Remote Control Codes

AV RECEIVER

TX-NR818

Instruction Manual

Contents

Safety Information and Introduction ............2

Table of Contents...........................................6

Connections .................................................13

Turning On & Basic Operations..................23

Advanced Operations ..................................51

Controlling Other Components...................82

Appendix.......................................................91

Internet Radio Guide

Remote Control Codes

En-2

Safety Information and Introduction

Important Safety Instructions

1. Read these instructions.

2. Keep these instructions.

3. Heed all warnings.

4. Follow all instructions.

5. Do not use this apparatus near water.

6. Clean only with dry cloth.

7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including

amplifiers) that produce heat.

9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug

has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If

the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,

and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12. Use only with the cart, stand,

tripod, bracket, or table

specified by the manufacturer,

or sold with the apparatus.

When a cart is used, use

caution when moving the

cart/apparatus combination to

avoid injury from tip-over.

13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when

unused for long periods of time.

14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been

damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or

plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects

have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been

exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally,

or has been dropped.

15. Damage Requiring Service

Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer

servicing to qualified service personnel under the

following conditions:

A. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen

into the apparatus,

C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or water,

D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by

following the operating instructions. Adjust only

those controls that are covered by the operating

instructions as an improper adjustment of other

controls may result in damage and will often

require extensive work by a qualified technician to

restore the apparatus to its normal operation,

E. If the apparatus has been dropped or damaged in

any way, and

F. When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in

performance this indicates a need for service.

16. Object and Liquid Entry

Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus

through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage

points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or

electric shock.

The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or

splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as

vases shall be placed on the apparatus.

Don’t put candles or other burning objects on top of

this unit.

17. Batteries

Always consider the environmental issues and follow

local regulations when disposing of batteries.

18. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation,

such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is

adequate ventilation.

Leave 20 cm (8") of free space at the top and sides and

10 cm (4") at the rear. The rear edge of the shelf or

board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm (4") away

from the rear panel or wall, creating a flue-like gap for

warm air to escape.

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR

MOISTURE.

CAUTION:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT

REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED

SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is

intended to alert the user to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

WARNING

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE

NE PAS OUVRIR

AVIS

PORTABLE CART WARNIN

S3125A

Safety Information and Introduction

En-3

Precautions

1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use

only, recording copyrighted material is illegal without

the permission of the copyright holder.

2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-

serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact your

Onkyo dealer.

3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all over

with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft cloth

dampened with a weak solution of mild detergent and

water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards with a

clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thinners,

alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because they may

damage the finish or remove the panel lettering.

4. Power

WARNING

BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE

FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION

CAREFULLY.

AC outlet voltages vary from country to country. Make

sure that the voltage in your area meets the voltage

requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel (e.g., AC

230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).

The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit

from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug is

readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.

For models with [POWER] button, or with both

[POWER] and [ON/STANDBY] buttons:

Pressing the [POWER] button to select OFF mode

does not fully disconnect from the mains. If you do not

intend to use the unit for an extended period, remove

the power cord from the AC outlet.

For models with [ON/STANDBY] button only:

Pressing the [ON/STANDBY] button to select

Standby mode does not fully disconnect from the

mains. If you do not intend to use the unit for an

extended period, remove the power cord from the AC

outlet.

5. Preventing Hearing Loss

Caution

Excessive sound pressure from earphones and

headphones can cause hearing loss.

6. Batteries and Heat Exposure

Warning

Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not

be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine, fire or the

like.

7. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never

handle this unit or its power cord while your hands are

wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets inside

this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo dealer.

8. Handling Notes

• If you need to transport this unit, use the original

packaging to pack it how it was when you originally

bought it.

• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit for a

long time, because they may leave marks on the

case.

• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm after

prolonged use. This is normal.

• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may not

work properly the next time you turn it on, so be sure

to use it occasionally.

For U.S. models

FCC Information for User

CAUTION:

The user changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with

the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15

of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. However, there is no

guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular

installation. If this equipment does cause harmful

interference to radio or television reception, which can be

determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is

encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more

of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and

receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different

from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician

for help.

Safety Information and Introduction

En-4

For Canadian Models

NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS

COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.

For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,

MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,

FULLY INSERT.

Modèle pour les Canadien

REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE LA

CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME NMB-003

DU CANADA.

Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:

ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS

ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS

LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE

CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER

JUSQU’AU FOND.

For British models

Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power

supply cord of this unit should be performed only by

qualified service personnel.

IMPORTANT

The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance

with the following code:

Blue: Neutral

Brown: Live

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this

apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings

identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured

black.

The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured

red.

IMPORTANT

The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse needs

to be replaced, the replacement fuse must approved by

ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the same ampere rating

as that indicated on the plug. Check for the ASTA mark or

the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.

If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket

outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable fuse

in the plug.

For European Models

Declaration of Conformity

We, ONKYO EUROPE

ELECTRONICS GmbH

LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6,

82194 GROEBENZELL,

GERMANY

GROEBENZELL, GERMANY

ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH

K. MIYAGI

declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product

described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the

corresponding technical standards such as EN60065,

EN55013, EN55020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3.

Safety Information and Introduction

En-5

Supplied Accessories

Make sure you have the following accessories:

*In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product

name indicates the color. Specifications and operations are the

same regardless of color.

■Installing the batteries

Note

• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try replacing the

batteries.

• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of batteries.

• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long time,

remove the batteries to prevent damage from leakage or

corrosion.

• Remove expired batteries as soon as possible to prevent damage

from leakage or corrosion.

■Aiming the remote controller

To use the remote controller, point it at the AV receiver’s

remote control sensor, as shown below.

Indoor FM antenna (➔page 22)

AM loop antenna (➔page 22)

Power cord (➔page 22)

Speaker cable labels (➔page 15)

Speaker setup microphone (➔page 38)

Remote controller (RC-840M) and two batteries (AA/R6)

(Note for China: The battery for the remote controller is not

supplied for this unit.)

Quick Start Guide

Batteries (AA/R6)

Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver.

Please read this manual thoroughly before making

connections and plugging in the unit.

Following the instructions in this manual will

enable you to obtain optimum performance and

listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.

Please retain this manual for future reference.

Remote control sensor

AV receiver

Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)

Safety Information and Introduction

En-6

Table of Contents

Safety Information and Introduction

Important Safety Instructions ......................................2

Precautions ...................................................................3

Supplied Accessories...................................................5

Table of Contents..........................................................6

Features.........................................................................7

Front & Rear Panels......................................................8

Remote Controller.......................................................12

Connections

Connecting the AV Receiver......................................13

Connecting Your Speakers .......................................13

About AV Connections..............................................18

Connecting Components with HDMI .........................19

Connecting Your Components ..................................20

Connecting Onkyo RI Components...........................21

Connecting the Antennas..........................................22

Connecting the Power Cord ......................................22

Turning On & Basic Operations

Turning On/Off the AV Receiver ................................23

Turning On ................................................................23

Turning Off ................................................................23

Initial Setup..................................................................24

Selecting the Language

for the Onscreen Setup Menus...............................24

Audyssey MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup ........................24

Source Connection....................................................25

Remote Mode Setup .................................................25

Network Connection..................................................25

Terminating the Initial Setup .....................................25

Playback ......................................................................26

Playing the Connected Component ..........................26

Controlling Contents of USB or Network Devices..... 27

Understanding Icons on the Display .........................28

Playing an iPod/iPhone via USB............................... 28

Playing a USB Device............................................... 29

Listening to vTuner Internet Radio............................ 29

Registering Other Internet Radio ..............................30

Changing the Icon Layout

on the Network Service Screen..............................31

Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA) ..................31

Remote Playback...................................................... 32

Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder ...................33

Listening to AM/FM Radio ........................................34

Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources..... 36

Using Basic Functions...............................................37

Using the Automatic Speaker Setup......................... 37

Using the Listening Modes .......................................40

Using the Home Menu ..............................................47

Using the Sleep Timer ..............................................48

Setting the Display Brightness.................................. 48

Displaying Source Information.................................. 48

Changing the Input Display....................................... 48

Using the Whole House Mode ..................................49

Selecting Speaker Layout.........................................49

Muting the AV Receiver ............................................49

Using Headphones ...................................................49

Using Easy Macros................................................... 50

Advanced Operations

On-screen Setup.........................................................51

Using the Quick Setup ..............................................51

Using the Audio Settings of Quick Setup..................52

Using the Setup Menu (HOME) ................................55

About the HYBRID STANDBY Indicator ................... 56

Setup Menu Items..................................................... 56

Input/Output Assign ..................................................57

Speaker Setup ..........................................................59

Audio Adjust.............................................................. 64

Source Setup ............................................................ 67

Listening Mode Preset ..............................................72

Miscellaneous ........................................................... 73

Hardware Setup........................................................ 74

Remote Controller Setup ..........................................77

Lock Setup................................................................ 77

Multi Zone ................................................................... 78

Making Multi Zone Connections ............................... 78

Controlling Multi Zone Components ......................... 79

Using the Remote Controller in

Zone and Multiroom Control Kits ........................... 81

Controlling Other Components

iPod/iPhone Playback via Onkyo Dock .................... 82

Using the Onkyo Dock.............................................. 82

Controlling Your iPod/iPhone ................................... 83

Controlling Other Components................................. 84

Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes .................. 84

Looking up for Remote Control Codes ..................... 84

Entering Remote Control Codes............................... 85

Remapping Colored Buttons .................................... 85

Remote Control Codes

for Onkyo Components Connected via RI ............. 86

Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons ................... 86

Resetting the Remote Controller .............................. 86

Controlling Other Components ................................. 86

Learning Commands ................................................ 89

Using Normal Macros ............................................... 90

Appendix

Troubleshooting ......................................................... 91

Firmware Update ........................................................ 97

Connection Tips and Video Signal Path ................ 101

Using an RIHD-compatible TV, Player,

or Recorder ............................................................ 104

About HDMI............................................................... 106

Network/USB Features............................................. 107

License and Trademark Information ...................... 110

Specifications........................................................... 111

To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it

on and, while holding down CBL/SAT, press

8ON/STANDBY (➔page 91).

Safety Information and Introduction

En-7

Features

Amplifier

• 135 Watts/Channel @ 8 ohms (FTC)

• 180 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (IEC)

• 230 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (JEITA)

• WRAT–Wide Range Amplifier Technology

(5 Hz to 100 kHz bandwidth)

• Linear Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry

• H.C.P.S. (High Current Power Supply) Massive High

Power Transformer

• 3 Stage Inverted Darlington Amplifier Design

Processing

• THX Select2 Plus Certified

• Incorporates Qdeo™ technology for HDMI Video

Upscaling (to 4K Compatible)

• HQV®-Vida Video Processing with 1080p Video

upscaling of All Video Sources via HDMI

• HDMI (Audio Return Channel, 3D, DeepColor,

x.v.Color, Lip Sync, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital

Plus, DSD and Multi-CH PCM)

• Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio

• Dolby Pro Logic IIz and Audyssey DSX®

• DTS Neo:X

• Non-Scaling Configuration

• A-Form Listening Mode Memory

•Direct Mode

• Pure Audio Mode

• Music Optimizer for Compressed Digital Music files

• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A Converters

• Powerful and Highly Accurate 32-bit Processing DSP

• Jitter Cleaning Circuit Technology

• Digital Processing Crossover Network

Connections

• 8 HDMI Inputs (1 on front panel) and 2 Outputs

• Onkyo p for System Control

• 6 Digital Inputs (3 Optical/3 Coaxial)

• Component Video Switching (2 Inputs/1 Output)

• Banana Plug-Compatible Speaker Posts

*In Europe, using banana plugs to connect speakers to an audio

amplifier is prohibited.

• Powered Zone 2/3

• Bi-Amping Capability for FL/FR with FHL/FHR

• Analog RGB Video Input (D-sub 15) for PC

• Internet Radio Connectivity

• Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files

• 2 USB Inputs (Front/Rear) for Memory Devices and

iPod®/iPhone® models (Enables Display of Album

Artwork)

*Only the front-panel USB input is compatible with

iPod/iPhone.

• MHL-Enabled AUX Front Input

Miscellaneous

• 40 FM/AM Presets

• Dolby Volume

• Audyssey MultEQ®XT32 to correct room acoustic

problems

• Audyssey Dynamic EQ® for loudness correction

• Audyssey Dynamic Volume® to maintain optimal

listening level and dynamic range

• Crossover Adjustment

(40/50/60/70/80/90/100/120/150/200 Hz)

• A/V Sync Control Function (up to 800 ms)

• Auto Standby Function

• On-Screen Display via HDMI

• Preprogrammed (with onscreen display setup)

RI-Compatible Learning Remote with 4 Activities and

Mode-Key LEDs

• ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) Video Calibration

Safety Information and Introduction

En-8

Front & Rear Panels

Front Panel

(North American models) (European, Australian and Asian models)

d e

fgh

ij l m o p tq sn

u w x yv

k r z

Safety Information and Introduction

En-9

The AV receiver has various logos printed on it. They are

not shown here for clarity.

For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.

a8ON/STANDBY button (23)

bRemote control sensor (5)

cDisplay (10)

dMASTER VOLUME control and indicator (26)

eHYBRID STANDBY indicator (56)

fPURE AUDIO button and indicator (40)

gInput selector buttons (26)

hFront flap

Gently push on the lower end of the front panel to open

the flap.

iPHONES jack (49)

jZONE 2, ZONE 3, and OFF buttons (79)

kTONE and Tone Level buttons (52)

lMONITOR OUT button (57)

mDISPLAY button (48)

nTUNING q/w (34), PRESET e/r (34), cursor and

enter (middle) buttons

oDIMMER button (North American models) (48)

pMEMORY button (34)

qTUNING MODE button (34)

rLISTENING MODE buttons (40)

sWHOLE HOUSE MODE button (49)

tSETUP MIC jack (38)

uSETUP button (55)

vHOME button (47, 55)

wRETURN button

xUSB port (20)

yAUX INPUT jacks (19, 20)

zRT/PTY/TP button (European, Australian and

Asian models) (35)

Safety Information and Introduction

En-10

For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.

aSpeaker/channel indicators

bZ2 (Zone 2) indicator (79)

cZ3 (Zone 3) indicator (79)

dListening mode and format indicators (40)

eM.Opt indicator (53)

f1, 3 and cursor indicators (28)

gNET indicator (29 to 33, 77)

hTuning indicators

RDS indicator (excluding North American models)

(35)

AUTO indicator (34)

TUNED indicator (34)

FM STEREO indicator (34)

iInput indicators (102)

HDMI indicator (75)

DIGITAL indicator

ANALOG indicator

jBi AMP indicator

kAudyssey indicator (37, 67)

Dynamic EQ indicator (67)

- (Dolby) Vol indicator

Dynamic Vol indicator (68)

lHeadphone indicator (49)

mMessage area

nMUTING indicator (49)

oVolume level

pUSB indicator (28, 29)

qSLEEP indicator (48)

Display

d c b f e h g a i

l j m n o p q k

Safety Information and Introduction

En-11

au REMOTE CONTROL jack

bUSB port

cETHERNET port

dRS232 port

Terminal for control.

eComposite video and analog audio jacks

(BD/DVD IN, CBL/SAT IN, STB/DVR IN, GAME 1

IN, PC IN, TV/CD IN and PHONO IN)

fHDMI IN and HDMI output (HDMI OUT MAIN and

HDMI OUT SUB) jacks

gCOMPONENT VIDEO IN and MONITOR OUT

jacks

hIR IN and OUT jacks

iZONE 2 and ZONE 3 12V TRIGGER OUT jacks

jZONE 2/ZONE 3 LINE OUT jacks

kFM ANTENNA jack and AM ANTENNA terminal

lPC IN jack

mAC INLET

nDIGITAL IN COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks

oGND screw

pMONITOR OUT V jack

qPRE OUT jacks

(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SB/FH/FW*,

SUBWOOFER)

rSB/FH/FW EXT AMP* jacks

sSpeaker Terminals

(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R,

SURR BACK L/R, FRONT HIGH/ZONE 3 L/R and

FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R)

*SB···Surround Back, FH···Front High, FW···Front Wide

Rear Panel

g m

p s r q o n

i h j e f l k a d b c

See “Connecting the AV Receiver” for connection

(➔pages 13 to 22).

Safety Information and Introduction

En-12

Remote Controller

For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.

a8RECEIVER button (23)

bACTIVITIES buttons (50)

cREMOTE MODE/INPUT SELECTOR buttons (26)

dSP (speaker layout) button (49)

eq/w/e/r and ENTER buttons

fQ SETUP button (51)

gListening Mode buttons (40)

hDIMMER button (48)

iDISPLAY button (48)

jMUTING button (49)

kVOL q/w button (26)

lRETURN button

mHOME button (47)

nSLEEP button (48)

■Controlling the tuner

To control the AV receiver’s tuner, press TUNER (or

RECEIVER).

You can select AM or FM by pressing TUNER repeatedly.

aq/w buttons (34)

bD.TUN button (34)

cDISPLAY button

dCH +/– button (35)

eNumber buttons (34)

*1 When you want to change the remote controller mode (target

component) without changing the current input source, press

MODE and within about 8 seconds, press REMOTE MODE.

Then, using the same AV receiver’s remote controller, you can

control the component corresponding to the button you

pressed.

*2 These buttons can also be used when a REMOTE MODE

other than Receiver mode is selected.

Controlling the AV Receiver

To control the AV receiver, press RECEIVER to select

Receiver mode.

You can also use the remote controller to control

Onkyo Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, CD player, and

other components.

See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for more

details (➔page 85).

En-13

Connections

Connecting the AV

Receiver

Speaker Configuration

The following table indicates the channels you should use

depending on the number of speakers that you have.

No matter how many speakers you use, a powered

subwoofer is recommended for a really powerful and solid

bass.

To get the best from your surround sound system, you need

to set the speaker settings automatically (➔page 37) or

manually (➔page 60).

*1 If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to

the SURR BACK L terminals.

*2 Front high, surround back and front wide speakers cannot be

used at the same time.

Connecting Your Speakers

Number of

speakers

234567778899910 11

Front speakers ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔ ✔

Center speaker ✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔ ✔

Surround

speakers

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔ ✔

Surround back

speaker*1*2

✔✔✔✔

Surround back

speakers*2

✔✔✔✔

Front high

speakers*2

✔✔✔✔✔✔

Front wide

speakers*2

✔✔✔✔✔✔

Connecting the Speaker Cables

The following illustration shows how to connect the

speakers to each pair of terminals. If you’re using only one

surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L

terminals.

Tip

• You can specify whether surround back, front high, or front wide

speakers are connected in the “Speaker Configuration” menu

(➔page 60) or during Audyssey MultEQ®XT32 Room

Correction and Speaker Setup (➔page 37).

■Screw-type speaker terminals

Strip 1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm) of insulation from the ends

of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires tightly, as

shown.

■Banana Plugs (North American models)

• If you are using banana plugs, tighten the speaker

terminal before inserting the banana plug.

• Do not insert the speaker code directly into the center

hole of the speaker terminal.

1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm)

Connections

En-14

■7.1-channel playback

Select the speakers (surround back, front high, front wide) you want to use for 7.1-channel playback.

You can set which speakers you want to use by priority. See “Selecting Speaker Layout” (➔page 49).

Surround

back left

Surround

left

Surround

right

Front high

left

Front high

right Front leftFront right Center

Front wide

right

Front wide

left

Surround

back right

■9.1-channel playback

By adding an external amplifier to the 7.1-channel

configuration shown on the left, you can enjoy 9.1-channel

playback.

Connect your power amplifier’s analog audio input jacks to

the AV receiver’s SB/FH/FW EXT AMP*1 jacks with

audio cables. To use the SB/FH/FW EXT AMP jacks, you

must specify their channel with the “Preout to External

Amplifier” setting (➔page 59).

You can set which speakers you want to use by priority.

See “Selecting Speaker Layout” (➔page 49).

*1 SB···Surround Back, FH···Front High, FW···Front Wide

Surround back left/

Front high left/

Front wide left

Surround back right/

Front high right/

Front wide right

Power amplifier

Connections

En-15

Attaching the Speaker Cable Labels

The speaker terminals are color-coded for identification

purpose.

The supplied speaker cable labels are also color-coded and

you should attach them to the positive (+) side of each

speaker cable in accordance with the table above. Then all

you need to do is to match the color of each label to the

corresponding speaker terminal.

Speaker Connection Precautions

Read the following before connecting your speakers:

• You can connect speakers with an impedance of between

4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of the connected

speakers is 4 ohms or more, but less than 6 ohms, be sure

to set the minimum speaker impedance to “4ohms”

(➔page 59). If you use speakers with a lower

impedance, and use the amplifier at high volume levels

for a long period of time, the built-in protection circuit

may be activated.

• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before

making any connections.

• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.

• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. In other

words, connect positive (+) terminals only to positive (+)

terminals, and negative (–) terminals only to negative (–)

terminals. If you get them the wrong way around, the

sound will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.

• Unnecessarily long, or very thin speaker cables may

affect the sound quality and should be avoided.

• Be careful not to short the positive and negative wires.

Doing so may damage the AV receiver.

• Make sure the metal core of the wire does not have

contact with the AV receiver’s rear panel. Doing so may

damage the AV receiver.

• Don’t connect more than one cable to each speaker

terminal. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.

• Don’t connect one speaker to several terminals.

Speaker Color

Front left, Front high left, Front wide left,

Zone 2 left, Zone 3 left

White

Front right, Front high right, Front wide

right, Zone 2 right, Zone 3 right

Red

Center Green

Surround left Blue

Surround right Gray

Surround back left Brown

Surround back right Tan

Connections

En-16

Using Dipole Speakers

You can use dipole speakers for the surround and surround

back speakers. Dipole speakers output the same sound in

two directions.

Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to

indicate how they should be positioned. The surround

dipole speakers (a) should be positioned so that their

arrows point toward the TV/screen, while the surround

back dipole speakers (b) should be positioned so that their

arrows point toward each other, as shown.

Using Powered Subwoofers

To find the best position for your subwoofer, while playing

a movie or some music with good bass, experiment by

placing your subwoofer at various positions within the

room, and choose the one that provides the most satisfying

results.

You can connect the powered subwoofer with two

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks respectively.

The same signal is output from each jack.

Tip

• If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re using an external

amplifier, connect the subwoofer pre out jack to an input on the

amplifier.

Bi-amping the Front Speakers

Bi-amping provides improved bass and treble performance.

When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to drive

up to a 5.1 speaker system in the main room.

Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections as

shown and turned on the AV receiver, you must set the

speaker setting to enable bi-amping (➔page 59).

TV/screen

LINE INPUT

Powered subwoofer

Corner

position

1/3 of wall

position

Important:

• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure to remove

the jumper bars that link the speakers’ tweeter (high) and

woofer (low) terminals.

• Bi-amping can be used only with speakers that support bi-

amping. Refer to your speaker manual.

Woofer (low)

Tweeter (high)

Front right Front left

Connections

En-17

Connecting a Power Amplifier

If you want to use a more powerful power amplifier, you

can use the AV receiver as a preamp. Connect all speaker

outputs to the power amplifier. See the manuals supplied

with your amplifier for details.

SB···Surround Back, FH···Front High, FW···Front Wide

Note

*1 Specify “None” for any channel that you don’t want to output

(➔page 60).

*2 When connecting to the SB/FH/FW EXT AMP jacks, you

must set the “Preout to External Amplifier” setting

(➔page 59).

Using Speakers Without Crossover Network

Connecting speakers without crossover network provide a

fine, three-dimensional sound field that extends bass and

treble performance to the fullest extent. When speakers

without crossover network are used, the AV receiver is

able to drive up to a 5.1 speaker system in the main room.

You must enable “Digital Crossover” in “Speaker Type

(Front)” (➔page 59) and make the settings of “Digital

Processing Crossover Network” (➔page 63).

Note

• You need to make the setting before connecting the speakers.

Power amplifier

Important:

• Speakers without crossover network are speakers with no

built-in crossover network.

• With speakers without crossover network, be careful NOT to

connect tweeters and woofers the wrong way around, as this

may damage your speakers.

• With speakers without crossover network, be careful not to set

“Speaker Type (Front)” to “Bi-Amp” as this may damage

your speakers. Make sure that this setting is set to “Digital

Crossover”.

• Confirm that your speakers are without crossover network by

referring to your speaker manual.

Woofer (low)

Tweeter (high)

Front right Front left

Connections

En-18

Connecting AV components

*1 If your TV doesn’t support Audio Return Channel (ARC), you

need to connect an optical digital cable together with the

HDMI cable to the AV receiver.

• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals

supplied with your AV components.

• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed and

double-checked all AV connections.

• Push plugs in all the way to make

good connections (loose connections

can cause noise or malfunctions).

• To prevent interference, keep audio

and video cables away from power

cords and speaker cables.

AV Cables and Jacks

■HDMI

HDMI connections can carry digital video and audio.

■Component video

Component video separates the luminance (Y) and color

difference signals (PB, PR), providing the best picture

quality (some TV manufacturers label their component

video sockets slightly differently).

■Analog RGB

This is a conventional analog interface to connect a PC and

a display device (also called D-Sub or D-subminiature).

■Composite video

Composite video is commonly used on TVs, DVDs, and

See also:

• “Connection Tips and Video Signal Path” (➔page 101)

• “Using an RIHD-compatible TV, Player, or Recorder”

(➔page 104)

• “About HDMI” (➔page 106)

Tip

• To listen to the audio of a component connected via HDMI

through your TV’s speakers, enable “HDMI Through”

(➔page 75) and set the AV receiver to standby mode.

Note

• In the case of Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, if no sound is output

despite following the above-mentioned procedure, set your Blu-

ray Disc/DVD player’s HDMI audio settings to PCM.

■Audio Return Channel (ARC) function

The Audio Return Channel (ARC) function enables an

HDMI capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI OUT

MAIN on the AV receiver.

• This function can be used when:

– Your TV is ARC capable, and

–The TV/CD input selector is selected, and

–“HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On”(➔page 75), and

–“Audio Return Channel” is set to “Auto” (➔page 76).

■MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link)

With its support for MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link),

the AUX (Front) input allows you to deliver high-

definition video from a connected mobile device.

Connecting Components with HDMI

Game console

TV, projector, etc.

Satellite/cable set-top box, etc.

Blu-ray Disc/DVD player

Personal computer

Camcorder, etc.

Set top box/digital video recorder, etc.

Jack Components

IN1 Blu-ray Disc/DVD player ✔

IN2 Satellite/cable set-top box, etc. ✔

IN3 Set top box/digital video recorder, etc. ✔

IN4 Game console ✔

IN5 Game console ✔

IN6 Personal computer ✔

IN7 Other components ✔

Front Camcorder, etc.

OUT MAIN TV

OUT SUB Projector, etc.

Connections

En-20

Connecting Your Components

The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is connected to other

video outputs, use the AV receiver’s display when changing settings.

B A

D A E F G H

Front

Rear

GND screw

Connect your components to the appropriate jacks. The

default input assignments are shown below. See

“Connection Tips and Video Signal Path” for more

information (➔page 101).

✔: Assignment can be changed (➔page 58).

No. Jack/Port Components

AUSB*1*2 iPod/iPhone, MP3 player,

USB flash drive

BUSB, AUX INPUT

VIDEO*3

iPod/iPhone (video

playback)

CAUX INPUT

VIDEO Camcorder, etc

AUDIO L/R

DIGITAL

DDIGITAL IN

COAXIAL 1 (BD/DVD) Blu-ray Disc/DVD player ✔

COAXIAL 2 (CBL/SAT) Satellite/cable set-top box,

etc.

✔

COAXIAL 3 (STB/DVR) Set top box/digital video

recorder, etc

✔

OPTICAL 1 (GAME 1) Game consoles ✔

OPTICAL 2 (TV/CD) TV, CD player ✔

EETHERNET Router

FMONITOR OUT TV, projector, etc.

BD/DVD IN Blu-ray Disc/DVD player

CBL/SAT IN Satellite/cable set-top box,

etc.

STB/DVR IN Set top box/digital video

recorder, etc

GAME 1 IN Game console, RI dock

PC IN Personal computer

TV/CD IN TV, CD player, cassette

tape deck, MD, CD-R,

Turntable*4, RI dock

PHONO IN Turntable*4

To be continued

Connections

En-21

Note

*1 Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB port on

your computer. Music on your computer cannot be played

through the AV receiver in this way.

*2 Only the front-panel USB input is compatible with

iPod/iPhone.

*3 When the USB input is selected, you can input video signals

from the AUX INPUT VIDEO jack. Video signals input from

AUX INPUT VIDEO will be output from the MONITOR

OUT V and HDMI output jacks.

*4 Connect a turntable (MM) that has a built-in phono preamp to

TV/CD IN, or connect it to PHONO IN with the phono

preamp turned off. If your turntable (MM) doesn’t have a

phono preamp, connect it to PHONO IN. If your turntable has

a moving coil (MC) type cartridge, you’ll need a commercially

available MC head amp or MC transformer to connect to

PHONO IN. See your turntable’s manual for details.

If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the AV

receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, connecting the

ground wire may produce an audible hum. If this happens,

disconnect it.

*5 When you connect your personal computer to PC IN and select

the PC input selector, the video of the personal computer is

output from the HDMI outputs. However, if you have assigned

the HDMI inputs to the PC input selector, the AV receiver will

output signals received from the HDMI inputs instead of

signals from PC IN. To have the signals output from PC IN,

select “-----” for “PC” in the “HDMI Input” setting

(➔page 58).

• With connection D, you can enjoy Dolby Digital and

DTS. (To listen in Zone 2/3 as well, use D and F.)

• With connection F, you can enjoy audio from external

components while you are in Zone 2/3.

• With connection F, if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player

has both the main stereo and multichannel outputs, be

sure to connect the main stereo.

With u (Remote Interactive), you can use the following

special functions:

■System On/Auto Power On

When you start playback on a component connected via

u, while the AV receiver is on standby, the AV

receiver will automatically turn on and select that

component as the input source.

■Direct Change

When playback is started on a component connected via

u, the AV receiver automatically selects that

component as the input source.

■Remote Control

You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to

control your other u-capable Onkyo components,

pointing the remote controller at the AV receiver’s

remote control sensor instead of the component. You

must enter the appropriate remote control code first

(➔page 86).

Note

•Use only u cables for u connections. u cables are supplied

with Onkyo components.

• Some components have two u jacks. You can connect either

one to the AV receiver. The other jack is for connecting

additional u-capable components.

• Connect only Onkyo components to u jacks. Connecting other

manufacturer’s components may cause a malfunction.

• Some components may not support all u functions. Refer to the

manuals supplied with your Onkyo components.

• While Zone 2/3 is on, the System On/Auto Power On and Direct

Change u functions do not work.

No. Jack/Port Components

GCOMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT TV, projector, etc.

IN 1 (BD/DVD) Blu-ray Disc/DVD player,

RI dock

✔

IN 2 (CBL/SAT) Satellite/cable set-top box,

RI dock, etc.

✔

HPC IN*5 Personal computer

Connecting Onkyo RI Components

1Make sure that each Onkyo component is

connected with an analog audio cable (connection

F in the hookup examples) (➔page 20).

2Make the u connection (see the illustration).

3If you’re using an RI Dock, or cassette tape deck,

change the Input Display (➔page 48). L R

ANALOG

AUDIO OUT

L R

ANALOG

AUDIO OUT

e.g., cassette tape deck

RI Dock

Connections

En-22

This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna.

The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna to use

the tuner.

Note

• Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll need to tune into a radio station and position the antenna to achieve the best possible

reception.

• Keep the AM loop antenna as far away as possible from your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power cords.

Tip

• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead.

• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available outdoor AM

antenna.

Connecting the Antennas

Thumbtacks, etc.

Insert the plug fully

into the jack.

Insert the plug fully

into the jack.

North American models European, Australian

and Asian models

Push. Insert wire. Release.

Assembling the AM loop antenna

Indoor FM antenna (supplied)AM loop antenna (supplied)

Caution

• Be careful not to injure yourself

when using thumbtacks.

Note

• Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your

speakers and AV components.

• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge

that might interfere with other electrical equipment on the same

circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver into a different

branch circuit.

• Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied with the AV

receiver. The supplied power cord is designed exclusively for use

with the AV receiver and should not be used with any other

equipment.

• Never disconnect the power cord from the AV receiver while the

other end is still plugged into a wall outlet. Doing so may cause

an electric shock. Always disconnect the power cord from the

wall outlet first, and then the AV receiver.

Connecting the Power Cord

1Connect the supplied power cord to the AV

receiver’s AC INLET.

2Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.

To AC wall outlet

En-23

Turning On & Basic Operations

Turning On/Off the AV

Receiver

Tip

•The HYBRID STANDBY indicator may light depending on the

status of settings (➔page 56).

• For details on power management settings, see “Auto Standby”

(➔page 76).

8RECEIVER

RECEIVER

8ON/STANDBY

Turning On

1Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.

Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on the

remote controller.

The AV receiver comes on and its display lights.

Turning Off

1Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.

Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on the

remote controller.

The AV receiver will enter standby mode. To prevent

any loud surprises when you turn on the AV receiver,

always turn down the volume before you turn it off.

■Smooth Operation in a Few Easy Steps

(Initial Setup)

To ensure smooth operation, here’s a few easy steps to

help you configure the AV receiver before you use it for

the very first time. These settings only need to be made

once. See “Initial Setup” for details (➔page 24).

■If the “Firmware Update Available” window

appears.

When a new version of the firmware is available, the

notification window “Firmware Update Available”

pops up. This notification only appears when the AV

receiver is connected to your home network

(➔page 107). To perform the firmware update, follow

the instructions on screen.

Use q/w and ENTER on the AV receiver or remote

controller to select one of the options.

`Update Now:

Starts the firmware update.

Refer to “Firmware Update” (➔page 97).

`Remind me Later:

The update notification will pop up again the next

time you turn the AV receiver on.

`Never Remind me:

Disables the automatic update notification.

Tip

• The update notification window can be enabled or disabled in

“Update Notice” (➔page 77).

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-24

Initial Setup

This section explains the settings that we recommend you

to make before using the AV receiver for the very first

time. A setup wizard is launched upon first-time use to let

you perform those settings.

This step determines the language used for the onscreen

setup menus. See “Language” in “OSD Setup”

(➔page 74).

Tip

• Pressing HOME will close the setup wizard. To restart the initial

setup, select “Initial Setup” in the “Hardware Setup” menu

(➔page 77).

After selecting the language for on-screen setup menus, a

welcome screen is displayed.

This step performs the automatic speaker setup.

The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is

connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.

Selecting the Language for the

Onscreen Setup Menus

1Use q/w on the AV receiver or remote controller to

select one of the following options, and then press

ENTER.

`Yes:

Continues to “Audyssey MultEQ XT32: Auto

Setup”.

`No:

Skips the settings and terminates the initial

setup. The setup wizard goes to “Terminating the

Initial Setup” (➔page 25). You can always

restart the initial setup by selecting “Initial

Setup” in the “Hardware Setup” menu

(➔page 77).

1st Step : Audyssey MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup

2nd Step : Source Connection

3rd Step : Remote Mode Setup

4th Step : Network Connection

Yes

Welcome to initial setup. Have you connected all the speakers and devices?

Before starting, please connect speakers and sources.

Now, would you like to start initial setup?

Exit

Initial Setup

HOME

Audyssey MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup

1Use q/w to select one of the following options, and

then press ENTER.

`Do it Now:

The automatic speaker setup is performed

following instructions on screen. Refer to step 2

of “Using the Automatic Speaker Setup”

(➔page 37). When this setting is complete, the

setup wizard continues to “Source Connection”.

`Do it Later:

Skips this setting.

Press ENTER and continue to “Source

Connection”.

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-25

This step checks the connection of source components. With this step, you can enter remote control codes for the

components you want to operate.

This step checks your network connection.

This step ends the initial setup process.

Source Connection

1Use q/w to select one of the following options, and

then press ENTER.

`Yes, Continue:

Performs the checkings.

`No, Skip:

Skips this step and continues to “Remote Mode

Setup”.

2Select the input selector for which you want to

check the connection and press ENTER.

The picture of the corresponding source should appear

on screen with a verification prompt.

3When prompted, use q/w to select one of the

following options and then press ENTER.

`Yes:

Confirms that the source is properly displayed.

`No:

Displays an error report. Follow the

troubleshooting instructions and recheck the

source.

4Use q/w to select one of the following options, and

then press ENTER.

`Yes:

Returns to step 2.

`No, Done Checking:

The setup wizard continues to “Remote Mode

Setup”.

Remote Mode Setup

1Use q/w to select one of the following options, and

then press ENTER.

`Yes:

Performs the remote control code input. Refer to

step 5 of “Looking up for Remote Control

Codes” (➔page 84).

`No, Skip:

Skips this step and continues to “Network

Connection”.

2When you’re finished, select one of the following

options and press ENTER.

`Yes, Done:

The setup wizard continues to “Network

Connection”.

`No, not yet:

You can enter other remote control codes.

Network Connection

1Use q/w to select one of the following options, and

then press ENTER.

`Yes:

Performs the checkings.

`No, Skip:

Skips this step and terminates the initial setup.

2Follow the instructions on screen to perform the

network checking.

The checking is complete when the message

“Successfully connected.” appears at the middle of

the screen. Press ENTER to terminate the initial

setup.

Tip

• If you have selected “Wireless (Option)”, you need to

configure the optional wireless adapter. For further details,

see the instruction manual provided with the wireless

adapter (UWF-1).

3If an error message appears, select one of the

following options and press ENTER.

`Retry:

Performs the checking again.

`No, Do it Later:

Skips this step and terminates the initial setup.

The setup wizard goes to “Terminating the

Initial Setup”.

Terminating the Initial Setup

1Press ENTER.

To restart the initial setup, select “Initial Setup” in

the “Hardware Setup” menu (➔page 77).

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-26

Playback

■Operating with the remote controller

■Operating on the AV receiver

The on-screen information appears only on a TV that

is connected to HDMI outputs. If your TV is

connected to other video outputs, use the AV

receiver’s display when changing settings.

This section describes the procedure for using the

remote controller, unless otherwise specified.

Playing the Connected Component

1Press RECEIVER followed by an INPUT

SELECTOR button.

RECEIVER

VOL q/w

INPUT SELECTOR

Listening mode buttons

2Start playback on the source component.

See also:

• “Playing an iPod/iPhone via USB” (➔page 28)

• “Playing a USB Device” (➔page 29)

• “Listening to vTuner Internet Radio” (➔page 29)

• “Registering Other Internet Radio” (➔page 30)

• “Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)”

(➔page 31)

• “Remote Playback” (➔page 32)

• “Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder”

(➔page 33)

• “Listening to AM/FM Radio” (➔page 34)

• “Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources”

(➔page 36)

• “iPod/iPhone Playback via Onkyo Dock”

(➔page 82)

• “Controlling Other Components” (➔page 84)

3To adjust the volume, use VOL q/w.

4Select a listening mode and enjoy!

See also:

• “Using the Listening Modes” (➔page 40)

• “Sound Program Edit” (➔page 66)

1Use the input selector buttons to select the input

source.

2Start playback on the source component.

3To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME

control.

4Select a listening mode and enjoy!

■Screen Saver

If there is no video signal on the current input source and

no operation for a specific time (three minutes by

default), a screen saver automatically comes on.

Tip

• The time until the screen saver activates itself can be changed

in the “Screen Saver” setting (➔page 74).

• The screen will return to its previous state if the AV receiver is

operated.

MASTER VOLUME

LISTENING MODE

Input selector buttons

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-27

Tip

• See “Controlling Other Components” about the operation of

other components (➔page 84).

Note

• The buttons you can use will differ depending on the devices and

media used for playback.

Controlling Contents of USB or

Network Devices

Press USB or NET first.

aTOP MENU

This button displays the top menu for each media or service.

bq/w and ENTER

These buttons navigate through the menus.

e/r

This button cycles through pages.

PLAYLIST e/r

In Standard Mode (iPod/iPhone), this button selects

playlists.

This button starts playback.

This button selects the beginning of the current song.

Pressing this button twice selects the previous song.

This button fast-reverses the current song.

This button pauses playback.

gSEARCH

You can toggle between the playback screen and the list

screen during playback.

hDISPLAY

This button switches between song information during

playback.

Press this button while the list screen is displayed to return to

the playback screen.

iALBUM +/–

In Standard Mode (iPod/iPhone), this button selects albums.

jMENU

This button displays the menu of Internet radio services.

kRETURN

This button returns to the previous menu.

This button selects the next song.

This button fast-forwards the current song.

This button stops playback.

oMODE

You can switch between Standard Mode and Extended

Mode.

pRANDOM

This button performs random playback.

qREPEAT

Press this button repeatedly to cycle through the repeat

modes.

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-28

This section describes icons that appear on the AV

receiver’s display during media playback.

This section explains how to play music/video files on the

iPod/iPhone.

Compatible iPod/iPhone models

Made for:

iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation), iPod classic,

iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th generation),

iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone

Note

• While the message “Connecting...” appears on the AV receiver’s

display, do not disconnect the USB cable supplied with your

iPod/iPhone or the USB device from the USB port.

• If you connect an iPod or iPhone to the USB port, no sound will

be output from the headphones jack.

Understanding Icons on the Display

Icon Description

Folder

Track

Playback

Pause

Fast Forward

Fast Reverse

Artist

Album

Repeat One Track

Repeat Folder (USB Device)

Repeat

Shuffle

Shuffle Album (iPod/iPhone)

Playing an iPod/iPhone via USB

The on-screen information appears only on a TV that

is connected to HDMI outputs.

1Press USB repeatedly to select the “USB(Front)”

input.

Tip

• The same operation can be done by selecting “USB” in the

Home menu.

2Connect the USB cable that comes with the

iPod/iPhone to the USB port on the front of the AV

receiver.

While reading the contents of your iPod/iPhone, the

message “Connecting...” appears on the AV

receiver’s display.

The USB indicator lights. It will flash if the AV

receiver cannot read the iPod/iPhone.

Tip

• When connecting your iPod/iPhone with a USB cable, we

recommend you use an official USB cable from Apple Inc.

3Press MODE repeatedly to switch to Extended

Mode (Music) or Extended Mode (Video).

A list of your iPod/iPhone model’s contents appears.

Tip

• If you want to operate using the iPod/iPhone or the remote

controller, press MODE repeatedly to switch to Standard

mode.

• When you disconnect the iPod/iPhone, the AV receiver

remembers the current mode. This means that if you

disconnect when in Extended Mode (Music), the AV

receiver will start in Extended Mode (Music) the next time

you connect the iPod/iPhone.

4Use q/w to select a folder, and then press ENTER to

open it.

Tip

• You can also use the q/w, enter (middle) and TUNING

MODE buttons on the front panel. TUNING MODE allows

you to switch modes.

5Use q/w to select a music/video file, and press

ENTER or 1 to start playback.

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-29

Extended Mode (Music) Control

The music content information is displayed (lists are

displayed), and you can control the music content while

looking at the screen.

Top screen list:

Playlists, Artists, Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,

Shuffle Songs, Now Playing.

Note

• In this mode, video contents are not displayed, even if they are

input from the AUX INPUT VIDEO jack on the AV receiver’s

front panel.

Extended Mode (Video) control

The video content information is displayed (lists are

displayed), and you can control the video content while

looking at the screen.

Top screen list:

Movies, Music Videos, TV Shows, Video Podcasts,

Rentals.

Note

• To view the video contents of your iPod/iPhone, connect it to the

USB port and AUX INPUT VIDEO jack on the AV receiver’s

front panel, using the official Apple Composite AV Cable.

• Depending on your iPod/iPhone model and generation, the

displayed items may vary and the support for Extended Mode

(Video) is not guaranteed.

Standard Mode Control

The content information is not displayed, but can be

operated using the iPod/iPhone or the remote controller.

This section explains how to play music files from a USB

device (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players).

See also:

• “Network/USB Features” (➔page 107).

Note

• While the message “Connecting...” appears on the AV receiver’s

display, do not disconnect the USB cable supplied with your

iPod/iPhone or the USB device from the USB port.

The vTuner Internet Radio Service is a portal site featuring

radio stations from all over the world.

You can search for stations by categories such as genre or

location. The AV receiver is preinstalled with this service.

Playing a USB Device

The on-screen information appears only on a TV that

is connected to HDMI outputs.

1Press USB repeatedly to select the “USB(Front)” or

“USB(Rear)” input.

2Plug your USB device into the AV receiver’s USB

port.

The USB indicator lights. It will flash if the AV

receiver cannot read the USB device.

3Press ENTER.

A list of the device’s contents appears. To open a

folder, use q/w to select it, and then press ENTER.

4Use q/w to select a music file, and press ENTER or

1 to start playback.

Listening to vTuner Internet Radio

You need to connect the AV receiver to your home

network (➔page 107). The on-screen information

appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI

outputs.

1Press NET.

The network service screen appears, and the NET

indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet

cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.

Tip

• The same operation can be done by selecting “Network

Service” in the Home menu.

2Use q/w/e/r to select “vTuner Internet Radio”

and then press ENTER.

3Use q/w to select a program and then press

ENTER.

Playback starts.

Tip

• You can find stations similar to the one being played.

During playback, press MENU on the remote controller,

select “Stations like this” and press ENTER.

Great Artist

My Music

My Favorite

0 : 11

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-30

Internet radio URLs in the following formats are

supported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,

depending on the type of data or audio format used by the

Internet radio station, you may not be able to listen to some

stations.

To listen to other Internet radio stations, you must register

your station in “My Favorites” of the network service

screen, as described below.

Note

• Services available may vary depending on the region. See the

separate instructions for more information.

Tip

• If you want to add a new station directly from “My Favorites”,

select an empty slot in the list and press MENU. Then, select

“Create New Station” and press ENTER.

Pressing ENTER again will display the keyboard screen. Use that

keyboard to enter the station’s name and URL respectively, and

then press ENTER.

• If you want to delete a station saved in “My Favorites”, press

MENU with the station selected or while the station is playing.

Then, use q/w to select “Delete from My Favorites” and press

ENTER. You can also delete stations from the Web Setup.

• If you want to rename a station, select the desired station and

press MENU. Then, use q/w to select “Rename this station” and

press ENTER.

• You can save up to 40 Internet radio stations.

■Adding vTuner Internet Radio Stations to

Favorites

There are two ways you can register specific Internet

radio stations (programs) from the vTuner Internet

Radio.

Adding to My Favorites

The selected program will be added to “My Favorites”

on the network service screen, which appears when

pressing NET on the remote controller.

1. Press MENU with the station selected or while a

station is playing.

2. Use q/w to select “Add to My Favorites”, and press

ENTER.

3. Use q/w/e/r to select “OK”, and press ENTER.

Adding to vTuner Internet Radio’s Favorites

Select “vTuner Internet Radio” and press ENTER to

display the “Favorites” folder that appears on the same

screen as “Stations By Genre”, “Stations By

Location”, etc. This is where your favorite Internet radio

bookmarks will be stored.

To register your favorite stations using a personal

computer, you need to connect your PC to the same

network as the AV receiver. Enter the ID# (MAC

address) of your unit on http://onkyo.vtuner.com/. You

can then register your favorite radio programs. The ID#

is shown at the bottom of the “vTuner Internet Radio”

top menu, and the AV receiver’s MAC address is shown

on “Network” of the Setup menu (➔page 76).

Tip

• You can rename the stations saved in “My Favorites”.

Registering Other Internet Radio

You need to connect the AV receiver to your home

network (➔page 107). The on-screen information

appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI

outputs.

1Select “Network” on the Setup menu to verify your

IP address (➔page 77).

Take a note of the IP address.

2On your computer, start your web browser.

3Enter the AV receiver’s IP address in the browser’s

Internet address (URL) field.

If you are using Internet Explorer®, you can also enter

the URL by selecting “Open...” on the “File” menu.

Information on the AV receiver is then shown on your

Internet browser (Web Setup).

4Click on the “My Favorites” tab, and enter the

Internet radio station’s name and URL.

5Click “Save” to save the Internet radio station.

The Internet radio station is then added to “My

Favorites”. To play the registered station, press NET,

and then select “My Favorites” on the network

service screen. A list of registered Internet radio

stations appears. Select the one that you saved and

press ENTER.

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-31

The layout of icons can be customized by switching their

positions on the network service screen.

This section explains how to play music files on a

computer or media server through the AV receiver (Server

Playback).

Windows Media Player 11 Setup

This section explains how to configure Windows Media

Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the music files

stored on your computer.

Changing the Icon Layout on the

Network Service Screen

You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output

(HDMI OUT MAIN) to make the following on-screen

setting.

1Press NET.

The network service screen appears, and the NET

indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet

cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.

Tip

• The same operation can be done by selecting “Network

Service” in the Home menu.

2Press MODE/D (blue) on the remote controller.

3Use q/w/e/r to select an icon to move, and then

press ENTER.

4Use q/w/e/r to select another icon as the

destination, and then press ENTER.

The icons switch positions and the message

“Completed!” appears.

Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)

You need to connect the AV receiver to your home

network (➔page 107). The on-screen information

appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI

outputs.

1Start your computer or media server.

2Press NET.

The network service screen appears. The NET

indicator lights. If it flashes, confirm the network

connection.

Tip

• The same operation can be done by selecting “Network

Service” in the Home menu.

3Use q/w/e/r to select “DLNA”, and press ENTER.

4Use q/w to select a server, and then press ENTER.

The menu is displayed according to the server

functions.

Note

• The search function does not work with media servers

which do not support this function.

• Photos and movies stored on a media server cannot be

accessed from the AV receiver.

• Depending on the sharing settings in the media server, the

AV receiver may not able to access the content. See the

instruction manual of the media server.

5Use q/w to select an item, and then press ENTER or

1 to start playback.

Note

• Depending on the media server, 5/4/3 may not

work.

• If the message “No Item.” appears, this means that no

information can be retrieved from the server. In this case,

check your server, network, and AV receiver connections.

1Start Windows Media Player 11.

2On the “Library” menu, select “Media Sharing”.

The “Media Sharing” dialog box appears.

3Select the “Share my media” check box, and then

click “OK”.

A list of the supported devices appears.

4Select the AV receiver in the list, and then click

“Allow”.

The corresponding icon will be checked.

Artist name

My favorite song 1

My favorite album

0 : 11

To be continued

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-32

Remote Playback means you can play the music files

stored on a media server or personal computer with the AV

receiver by operating the controller device in the home

network.

Windows Media Player 12 Setup

This section explains how to configure Windows Media

Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the music files

stored on your personal computer.

Using Remote Playback

Note

• Remote playback cannot be used in any of the following cases:

– Network services are being used.

– Contents are being played from a USB device or iPod/iPhone.

– Zones are turned on.

5Click “OK” to close the dialog box.

This completes the Windows Media Player 11

configuration.

You can now play the music files in your Windows

Media Player 11 library through the AV receiver.

Tip

• Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free from

the Microsoft web site.

Remote Playback

You need to connect the AV receiver to your home

network (➔page 107). The on-screen information

appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI

outputs.

1Start Windows Media Player 12.

2On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media

streaming”.

A dialog box appears.

Tip

• If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on

“More streaming options...” in the “Stream” menu will

display a list of the playback devices connected to the

network. You can skip step 3.

3Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media

streaming”.

A list of media server appears. Wording may vary

slightly depending on the network location.

4On the “Media streaming options”, select the AV

receiver and confirm that it is set to “Allow”.

5Click “OK” to close the dialog box.

This completes the Windows Media Player 12

configuration.

You can now play the music files in your Windows

Media Player 12 library.

Tip

• On the “Stream” menu, confirm that “Allow remote control

of my Player...” is checked.

1Turn on the AV receiver.

2Start Windows Media Player 12.

To enable remote playback, you must first configure

Windows Media Player 12.

3On Windows Media Player 12, right-click on a

music file.

The right-click menu appears.

Tip

• For selecting another media server, select the desired media

server from the “Other Libraries” menu on Windows Media

Player 12.

4Select the AV receiver in “Remote playback”.

The “Play to” window appears and playback on the

AV receiver starts. Operations during remote playback

can be made from the “Play to” window of Windows 7

on your personal computer.

A playback screen will be displayed on the connected

TV.

5Adjusting the Volume.

You can adjust the volume by adjusting the volume

bar in the “Remote playback” window. The default

maximum volume level is 82 (0dB). If you wish to

change this, enter the value from the Web Setup in

your browser. Refer to step 3 of “Registering Other

Internet Radio” for details (➔page 30).

The volume value of the remote window and the

volume value of the AV receiver may not always

match.

Adjustments you make to the volume in the AV

receiver will not be reflected in the “Remote

playback” window.

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-33

This section explains how to play music files on a

computer or NAS (Network Attached Storage) through the

AV receiver.

Windows 7 Setup

■Setting the sharing options

■Creating a shared folder Playing music files on a shared folder

In order to enjoy Home Media, you must first create a

shared folder on your computer.

Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder

1Select “Choose homegroup and sharing options” on

the Control Panel.

Tip

• If this option is not available, verify that “View by:” is set to

“Category”.

2Select “Change advanced sharing settings”.

3Under “Home or Work”, verify that the following

items are checked:

“Turn on network discovery”, “Turn on file and

printer sharing”, “Turn on sharing so anyone with

network access can read and write files in the Public

folders”, and “Turn off password protected sharing”.

4Select “Save changes” and click “OK” on the

confirmation screen.

1Right-click the folder that you want to share.

2Select “Properties”.

3On the “Sharing” tab, select “Advanced Sharing”.

4Check the check box of “Share this folder” and then

click “OK”.

5Under “Network File and Folder Sharing”, select

“Share”.

6Select and add “Everyone” from the pull-down

menu and then click “Share”.

Tip

• With this setting, everyone is allowed to access the folder.

If you want to assign a user name and password to the

folder, make the corresponding settings for “Permissions”

in “Advanced Sharing” of the “Sharing” tab.

• Verify that “Workgroup” is properly set.

Note

• When using NAS (Network Attached Storage), refer to the

instruction manual provided with your NAS unit.

1On the remote controller, press RECEIVER

followed by NET.

The network service screen appears. The NET

indicator lights. If it flashes, confirm the network

connection.

Tip

• The same operation can be done by selecting “Network

Service” in the Home menu.

2Use q/w/e/r to select “Home Media”, and press

ENTER.

3Use q/w to select a server, and then press ENTER.

Tip

• The server name of your computer can be viewed on the

computer properties screen.

4Use q/w to select the desired shared folder and then

press ENTER.

5When asked for a user name and password, enter

the necessary login information.

Tip

• The login information will be remembered for the next time

you log in.

• The login information is that of the user account set when

creating a shared folder.

6Use q/w to select a music file and then press ENTER

or 1.

The playback of the selected file starts.

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-34

Using the Tuner

With the built-in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio

stations. You can store your favorite stations as presets for

quick selection.

You can also change the frequency steps (➔page 74).

Tuning into Radio Stations

■Auto tuning mode

■Manual tuning mode

In manual tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.

■Tuning into stations by frequency

You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by entering

the appropriate frequency.

Presetting AM/FM Stations

You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite

AM/FM radio stations as presets.

Listening to AM/FM Radio

This section describes the procedure of using the

buttons on the front panel, unless otherwise specified.

1Press TUNER to select either “AM” or “FM”.

In this example, FM has been selected.

Each time you press TUNER, the radio band changes

between AM and FM.

(Actual display depends on the country.)

Band Frequency

1Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator

lights on the AV receiver’s display.

2Press TUNING q/w.

Searching stops when a station is found.

When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator

lights. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM

STEREO indicator lights as shown.

Tip

• Tuning into weak FM stereo stations

If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be

impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to

manual tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.

1Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator

goes off on the AV receiver’s display.

2Press and hold TUNING q/w.

The frequency stops changing when you release the

button.

Press the buttons repeatedly to change the frequency

one step at a time.

TUNED

TERE

AUTO

1On the remote controller, press TUNER repeatedly

to select “AM” or “FM”, followed by D.TUN.

(Actual display depends on the country.)

2Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to enter

the frequency of the radio station.

For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM), press 8, 7, 5 or 8,

7, 5, 0.

If you have entered the wrong number, you can retry

after 8 seconds.

1Tune into the AM/FM station that you want to store

as a preset.

See the previous section.

2Press MEMORY.

The preset number flashes.

(Actual display depends on the country.)

3While the preset number is flashing (about 8

seconds), use PRESET e/r to select a preset from

1 through 40.

To be continued

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-35

■Selecting Presets

■Deleting Presets

Using RDS (excluding North American

models)

When tuned into an RDS station, the RDS indicator lights.

When the station is broadcasting text information, the text

can be displayed.

■What is RDS?

RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of

transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed by

the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is available

in most European countries. Many FM stations use it these

days. In addition to displaying text information, RDS can

also help you find radio stations by type (e.g., news, sport,

rock, etc.).

The AV receiver supports four types of RDS information:

PS (Program Service)

When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS

information, the station’s name will be displayed. Pressing

DISPLAY will display the frequency for 3 seconds.

RT (Radio Text)

When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text

information, the text will be shown on the AV receiver’s

display as described in the next section.

PTY (Program Type)

This allows you to search for RDS radio stations by type.

TP (Traffic Program)

This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that

broadcast traffic information (➔page 36).

Note

• In some cases, the text characters displayed on the AV receiver

may not be identical to those broadcast by the radio station. Also,

unexpected characters may be displayed when unsupported

characters are received. This is not a malfunction.

• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data may be

displayed intermittently or not at all.

■Displaying Radio Text (RT)

■Finding Stations by Type (PTY)

You can search for radio stations by type.

4Press MEMORY again to store the station or

channel.

The station or channel is stored and the preset number

stops flashing.

Repeat this procedure for all of your favorite AM/FM

radio stations.

1To select a preset, use PRESET e/r on the AV

receiver, or the remote controller’s CH +/–.

Tip

• You can also use the remote controller’s number buttons to

select a preset directly.

1Select the preset that you want to delete.

See the previous section.

2While holding down MEMORY, press TUNING

MODE.

The preset is deleted and its number disappears from

the AV receiver’s display.

RDS works only in areas where RDS broadcasts are

available.

1Press RT/PTY/TP once.

The RT information scrolls across the AV receiver’s

display.

Note

• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV receiver

waits for the RT information.

• If the message “No Text Data” appears, no RT information

is available.

1Press RT/PTY/TP twice.

The current program type appears on the AV

receiver’s display.

2Use PRESET e/r to select the type of program

you want.

See the table shown later in this chapter.

3To start the search, press the enter button.

The AV receiver searches until it finds a station of the

type you specified, at which point it stops briefly

before continuing with the search.

4When a station you want to listen to is found, press

the enter button.

If no stations are found, the message “Not Found”

appears.

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-36

■Listening to Traffic News (TP)

You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.

RDS program types (PTY)

You can listen to the audio of one input source while

watching the video of another. This function takes

advantage of the fact that when an audio-only input source

(PC, TV/CD, PHONO) is selected, the video input source

remains unchanged. The following procedure shows how

to listen to a CD player’s audio source connected to

TV/CD IN while watching a Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s

video source connected to BD/DVD.

1Press RT/PTY/TP three times.

If the current radio station is broadcasting TP (Traffic

Program), “[TP]” will appear on the AV receiver’s

display. If “TP” without square brackets appears, this

means that the station is not broadcasting TP.

2To locate a station that is broadcasting TP, press

the enter button.

The AV receiver searches until it finds a station that’s

broadcasting TP.

If no stations are found, the message “Not Found”

appears.

Type Display

None None

News reports News

Current affairs Affairs

Information Info

Sport Sport

Education Educate

Drama Drama

Culture Culture

Science and technology Science

Varied Varied

Pop music Pop M

Rock music Rock M

Middle of the road music Easy M

Light classics Light M

Serious classics Classics

Other music Other M

Weather Weather

Finance Finance

Children’s programmes Children

Social affairs Social

Religion Religion

Phone in Phone In

Travel Travel

Leisure Leisure

Jazz music Jazz

Country music Country

National music Nation M

Oldies music Oldies

Folk music Folk M

Documentary Document

Alarm test TEST

Alarm Alarm!

Playing Audio and Video from Separate

Sources

1Press BD/DVD.

2Press TV/CD.

The audio output changes to the CD source, but the

video of previously-selected BD/DVD is retained.

3Start playback on your Blu-Ray Disc/DVD and CD

players.

You can now enjoy watching your Blu-ray Disc/DVD

with the sound of your CD player.

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-37

Using Basic Functions

With the supplied calibrated microphone,

Audyssey MultEQ®XT32 automatically determines the

number of speakers connected, their size for purposes of

bass management, optimum crossover frequencies to the

subwoofer (if present), and distances from the primary

listening position.

Audyssey MultEQ XT32 then removes the distortion

caused by room acoustics by capturing room acoustical

problems over the listening area in both the frequency and

time domain. The result is clear, well-balanced sound for

everyone. Audyssey MultEQ XT32 can be used with

Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and

Audyssey Dynamic Volume® (➔pages 67, 68).

Before using this function, connect and position all of your

speakers.

Audyssey MultEQ XT32 offers two ways of measuring:

the “Audyssey Quick Start” and

“Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration”.

•“Audyssey Quick Start” uses the measurement from one

position to perform the speaker setting only.

•“Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration” uses the

measurement from eight positions to correct room

response in addition to the speaker setting.

The more positions are used in measuring, the better the

listening environment will become. We recommend using

a measurement from eight positions to create the best

listening environment.

The Quick Start takes 2 minutes and Full Calibration takes

about 20 minutes.

Total measurement time varies depending on the number

of speakers.

Measurement procedure

To create a listening environment in your home theater that

all listeners will enjoy, Audyssey MultEQ XT32 takes

measurements at up to eight positions within the listening

area. Position the microphone at ear height of a seated

listener with the microphone tip pointed directly at the

ceiling using a tripod. Do not hold the microphone in your

hand during measurements as this will produce inaccurate

results.

■First measurement position

Also referred to as the Main Listening Position, this

refers to the most central position where one would

normally sit within the listening environment.

Audyssey MultEQ XT32 uses the measurements from

this position to calculate speaker distance, level,

polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the

subwoofer.

■Second-eighth measurement positions

These are the other listening positions (i.e., the places

where the other listeners will sit). You can measure up

to eight positions.

Note

• Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise and Radio

Frequency Interference (RFI) can disrupt the room

measurements. Close windows, televisions, radios, air

conditioners, fluorescent lights, home appliances, light dimmers,

or other devices. Turn off the cell phone (even if it is not in use)

or place it away from all audio electronics.

• The microphone picks up test tones played through each speaker

as Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup

runs.

• Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup

cannot be performed while a pair of headphones is connected.

Using the Automatic Speaker Setup

fed

: Listening area a to h: Listening position

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-38

1Turn on the AV receiver and the connected TV.

On the TV, select the input to which the AV receiver

is connected.

2Set the speaker setup microphone at the Main

Listening Position a, and connect it to the SETUP

MIC jack.

The speaker setting menu appears.

Note

• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is connected

to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is connected to other

video outputs, use the AV receiver’s display when changing

settings.

3When you’ve finished making the settings, press

ENTER.

Perform the “Speaker Setup” according to your

speaker configuration:

–Speakers Type (Front) (➔page 59)

–Powered Zone 2 (➔page 59)

–Powered Zone 3 (➔page 59)

–Preout to External Amplifier (➔page 59)

–Subwoofer (➔page 60)

If you use a powered subwoofer(s), go to step 4. If not,

go to step 5.

Speaker setup microphone

SETUP MIC jack

MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup

AUDYSSEY

Speakers Type(Front)

Powered Zone 2

Powered Zone 3

Preout to External Amplifier

Subwoofer

Normal

Yes

If “Speakers Type (Front)” is set to “Digital

Crossover”, a confirmation screen appears. Select

“Next (2-7. Digital Processing Crossover Network)”

to display the screen for Digital Processing Crossover

Network (➔page 63). Continue with the settings.

4Adjust the subwoofer volume level to 75 dB, and

then press ENTER.

Test tones are played through the subwoofer. Use the

volume control on the subwoofer.

Note

• If your subwoofer does not have a volume control, disregard

the displayed level and press ENTER to proceed to the next

step.

• If you set the subwoofer’s volume control to its maximum

and the level displayed is lower than 75 dB, leave the

subwoofer’s volume control at its maximum and press

ENTER to proceed to the next step.

5Use q/w to select “Audyssey Quick Start” or

“Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration”, and

then press ENTER.

6Press ENTER.

Audyssey MultEQ®XT32 Room Correction and

Speaker Setup starts.

Test tones are played through each speaker as

Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and

Speaker Setup runs. This process takes a few minutes.

Please refrain from talking during measurements

and do not stand between speakers and the

microphone.

Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone

during Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and

Speaker Setup, unless you want to cancel the setup.

If you select “Audyssey Quick Start”, you will go to

step 9.

7Place the speaker setup microphone at the next

position, and then press ENTER.

Audyssey MultEQ XT32 performs more

measurements. This takes a few minutes.

8When prompted, repeat step 7.

9Use q/w to select an option, and then press ENTER.

The options are:

`Save:

Save the calculated settings and exit

Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and

Speaker Setup.

`Cancel:

Cancel Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room

Correction and Speaker Setup.

Tip

• You can view the calculated settings for the speaker

configuration, speaker distances, and speaker levels by

using e/r.

Save

Cancel

MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup

AUDYSSEY

-- Review Speaker Configuration --

Yes

40Hz

100Hz

None

100Hz

120Hz

2ch

Subwoofer

Front

Center

Surround

Front Wide

Front High

Surround Back

Surround Back Ch

To be continued

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-39

Note

• You can cancel Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and

Speaker Setup at any point in this procedure simply by

disconnecting the setup microphone.

• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during

Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup.

• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted automatically

when Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker

Setup starts.

• Changes to the room after Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room

Correction and Speaker Setup requires you run

Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup

again, as room EQ characteristics may have changed.

Error Messages

While Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and

Speaker Setup is in progress, one of the error messages

below may appear.

The options are:

`Retry:

Try again.

`Cancel:

Cancel Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction

and Speaker Setup.

• Ambient noise is too high.

The background noise is too loud. Remove the source of

the noise and try again.

• Speaker Matching Error!

The number of speakers detected was different from that

of the first measurement. Check the speaker connection.

• Writing Error!

This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again. If

this message appears after 2 or 3 attempts, contact your

Onkyo dealer.

• Speaker Detect Error

This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “No”

means that no speaker was detected.

Tip

• See “Speaker Configuration” for appropriate settings

(➔page 13).

Changing the Speaker Setup Manually

You can manually make changes to the settings found

during Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and

Speaker Setup.

See also:

• “Speaker Configuration” (➔page 60)

• “Speaker Distance” (➔page 61)

• “Level Calibration” (➔page 61)

• “Equalizer Settings” (➔page 62)

Note

• Please note that THX recommends any THX main speakers be set

to “80Hz(THX)”. If you set up your speakers using

Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup,

please make sure manually that any THX speakers are set to

“80Hz(THX)” crossover (➔page 60).

• Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and

the interaction with the room, THX recommends setting the level

and the distance of the subwoofer manually.

• Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may notice

irregular results when setting the level and/or distance of the main

speakers. If this happens, THX recommends setting them

manually.

Using a Powered Subwoofer

If you’re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs very

low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it may not be

detected by Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction

and Speaker Setup.

If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review Speaker

Configuration” screen as “No”, increase the subwoofer’s

volume to the half-way point, set it to its highest crossover

frequency, and then try running Audyssey MultEQ XT32

Room Correction and Speaker Setup again. Note that if the

volume is set too high and the sound distorts, detection

issues may occur, so use an appropriate volume level. If the

subwoofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or

Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for

details.

Use q/w to select a target, and use e/r to change

the setting.

After the results of Audyssey MultEQ®XT32 have

been saved, the menu will display the “Audyssey”

(➔page 67), “Dynamic EQ” (➔page 67),

“Dynamic Volume” (➔page 68) settings.

Note

•When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for

measurement, “Audyssey” cannot be selected.

• These settings are applied to all input selectors.

Press ENTER.

Disconnect the speaker setup microphone.

Retry

Cancel

Ambient noise is too high.

AUDYSSEY

MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup

Error message

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-40

Selecting Listening Modes

See “About Listening Modes” for detailed information

about the listening modes.

■Listening Mode Buttons

MOVIE/TV button

This button selects the listening modes intended for use

with movies and TV.

MUSIC button

This button selects the listening modes intended for use

with music.

GAME button

This button selects the listening modes intended for use

with video games.

THX button

This button selects the THX listening modes.

PURE AUDIO button and indicator

This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.

When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s display and

analog video circuitry are turned off. Only video signals

input through HDMI input can be output from the HDMI

output. The indicator lights when this mode is selected.

Pressing this button again will select the previous listening

mode.

About Listening Modes

The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your

listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with

high fidelity and stunning surround sound.

■Explanatory Notes

abFront speakers

cCenter speaker

deSurround speakers

fSubwoofer(s)

ghSurround back speakers

ijFront high speakers

klFront wide speakers

Using the Listening Modes

GAME

THX

MOVIE/TV

MUSIC

Press RECEIVER first.

PURE AUDIO MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME, THX

• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can only be

selected if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player is connected to

the AV receiver with a digital audio connection (coaxial,

optical, or HDMI).

• The listening modes you can select depends on the format

of the input signal. To check the format, see “Displaying

Source Information” (➔page 48).

• While a pair of headphones is connected, you can select the

following listening modes: Pure Audio, Mono, Direct, and

Stereo.

ab f

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-41

Input Source

The following audio formats are supported by the listening

modes.

Speaker Layout

The illustration shows which speakers are activated in each

channel. See “Speaker Configuration” for the speaker setup

(➔page 60).

*1 Press RECEIVER followed by SP (speaker layout) repeatedly

to select the speakers you want to use: front high, front wide,

or surround back.

*2 After enabling the corresponding speakers, press RECEIVER

followed by SP (speaker layout) repeatedly to select the layout

you want to use. These layouts are only available when

“Preout to External Amplifier” (➔page 59) is enabled.

AThis is mono (monophonic) sound.

SThis is stereo (stereophonic) sound. Two

independent audio signal channels are reproduced

through two speakers.

DThis is 5.1-channel surround sound. This surround

system has five main channels of sound and a sixth

subwoofer channel (called the point-one channel).

FThis is 7.1-channel surround sound. This is a

further sound enhancement to 5.1-channel sound

with two additional speakers that provide greater

sound envelopment and more accurate positioning

of sounds.

GThis is DTS-ES surround sound. This surround

system can produce a discrete or a matrix-encoded

sixth channel from existing DTS 5.1 encoded

material.

HThis is Dolby Digital EX surround sound. This

provides a center back surround channel from 5.1-

channel sources.

Listening mode buttons

SP (speaker layout)

N*1 B

M*2 J

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-42

■Onkyo-Original DSP Listening Modes

Listening Mode Description Input

Source

Speaker

Layout

Orchestra Suitable for classical or operatic music, this

mode emphasizes the surround channels in

order to widen the stereo image, and

simulates the natural reverberation of a large

hall.

CNM

Unplugged Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals and

jazz, this mode emphasizes the front stereo

image, giving the impression of being right

in front of the stage.

Studio-Mix Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to

music in this mode creates a lively sound

field with a powerful acoustic image, like

being at a club or rock concert.

TV Logic This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV

shows produced in a TV studio, surround

effects to the entire sound, and clarity to

voices.

Game-RPG In this mode, the sound has a dramatic feel

with a similar atmosphere to Orchestra

mode.

Game-Action In this mode, sound localization is distinct

with emphasis on bass.

Game-Rock In this mode, sound pressure is emphasized

to heighten live feel.

Game-Sports In this mode, reverberation is increased and

sound localization decreased slightly.

Or c es t rah

Unp uggedl

Stu io–Mi xd

TV og icL

Gam –RPGe

Gam –Ac t i one

Gam –Ro c ke

Gam –Spor tse

All Ch Stereo Ideal for background music, this mode fills

the entire listening area with stereo sound

from the front, surround, and surround back

speakers.

XCN

Full Mono In this mode, all speakers output the same

sound in mono, so the sound you hear is the

same regardless of where you are within the

listening room.

T-D (Theater-

Dimensional)

With this mode you can enjoy a virtual

surround sound even with only two or three

speakers. This works by controlling how

sounds reach the listener’s left and right ears.

Good results may not be possible if there’s

too much reverb, so we recommend that you

use this mode in an environment with little

or no natural reverb.

ZXC

Listening Mode Description Input

Source

Speaker

Layout

Al l Ch Stereo

Fu l Monol

T–D

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-43

■Listening Modes

Listening Mode Description Input

Source

Speaker

Layout

Pure Audio*1 In this mode, the display and video circuitry

are turned off, minimizing possible noise

sources for the ultimate in high-fidelity

audio reproduction. (As the analog video

circuitry is turned off, only video signals

input through HDMI IN can be output from

the HDMI output.)

ZXC

N*2M

Direct In this mode, audio from the input source is

output without surround-sound processing.

The speaker configuration (presence of

speakers) and speaker distance settings are

enabled, but much of the processing set via

the audio setup is disabled. See “On-screen

Setup” for more details (➔page 51).

Stereo Sound is output from the front left and right

speakers and subwoofer.

ZXC

Mono Use this mode when watching an old movie

with a mono soundtrack, or use it with the

foreign language soundtracks recorded in the

left and right channels of some movies. It

can also be used with DVDs or other sources

containing multiplexed audio, such as

karaoke DVDs.

Multichannel This mode is for use with PCM multichannel

sources.

XCN

DSD*3 In this mode, audio from the input source is

output without surround-sound processing.

The speaker configuration (presence of

speakers), crossover frequency, speaker

distance, A/V Sync and much of the

processing set via the audio setup are

enabled. See “On-screen Setup” for more

details (➔page 51).

D XCN

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital Plus*4 D XCN

F XCN*2

Dolby TrueHD D XCN

F XCN*2

PureAAud i o

Di rect

Stereo

Mono

Mu l t ich

DSD

Dolby D

Dolby D +

Dolby TrueHD

DTS In this mode, audio from the input source is

output without surround-sound processing.

The speaker configuration (presence of

speakers), crossover frequency, speaker

distance, A/V Sync and much of the

processing set via the audio setup are

enabled. See “On-screen Setup” for more

details (➔page 51).

DXCN

DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio

DXCN

FXCN

DTS-HD Master

Audio

DXCN

FXCN

DTS Express DXCN

DTS 96/24*5 This mode is for use with DTS 96/24

sources. This is high-resolution DTS with a

96 kHz sampling rate and 24-bit resolution,

providing superior fidelity. Use it with

DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.

DXCN

DTS-ES Discrete*6 This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete

soundtracks, which use a discrete surround

back channel for true 6.1/7.1-channel

playback. The seven totally separate audio

channels provide better spatial imaging and

360-degree sound localization, perfect for

sounds that pan across the surround

channels. Use it with DVDs that bear the

DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-

ES Discrete soundtrack.

DTS-ES Matrix*6 This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix

soundtracks, which use a matrix-encoded

back-channel for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.

Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-ES

logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Matrix

soundtrack.

Listening Mode Description Input

Source

Speaker

Layout

DTS

DTS–HD HR

DTS–HD MSTR

DTS Ex p r e s s

DTS 96 / 24

ES iscreteD

ES a t r i xM

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-44

Dolby Pro Logic IIx*7

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2-channel

source for 7.1-channel playback. It provides

a very natural and seamless surround-sound

experience that fully envelops the listener.

As well as music and movies, video games

can also benefit from the dramatic spatial

effects and vivid imaging.

If you’re not using any surround back

speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be used

instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.

• Dolby PLIIx Movie

Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby

Surround (Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV,

DVD, VHS).

• Dolby PLIIx Music

Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby

Surround (Pro Logic) music source (e.g.,

CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).

•Dolby PLIIx Game

Use this mode with video games, especially

those that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.

S XCN

• Dolby PLIIx Movie

• Dolby PLIIx Music

These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx

modes to expand 5.1-channel sources for

7.1-channel playback.

Dolby Pro Logic IIz

Height

Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height is designed to

more effectively use existing program

material when height channel speaker

outputs are present. Dolby Pro Logic IIz

Height can be used to upmix a variety of

sources from movies and music, but are

particularly well-suited to upmix game

content.

Dolby EX These modes expand 5.1-channel sources for

6.1/7.1-channel playback. They’re especially

suited to Dolby EX soundtracks that include

a matrix-encoded surround back channel.

The additional channel adds an extra

dimension and provides an enveloping

surround sound experience, perfect for

rotating and fly-by sound effects.

Listening Mode Description Input

Source

Speaker

Layout

PL Mov i e

PL Mus i c

PL Game

PL x Mov i e

PL x Mus i c

PL x Game

PL z He i gh t

Dolby EX

Dolby D EX

DTS Neo:X*8 This mode expands various sources and

various inputs up to 9.1 channel.

DTS Neo:X provides semi-spherical sound

field adding height/wide speakers to create a

natural, immersive and spacious surround

soundscape.

• DTS Neo:X Cinema

This mode is suitable for movie viewing.

•DTS Neo:X Music

This mode is suitable for any music source.

•DTS Neo:X Game

This mode is suitable for video games.

XCN

Audyssey DSX*9 • Audyssey DSX

Audyssey DSX® is a scalable system that

adds new speakers to improve surround

impression. Starting with a 5.1 system

Audyssey DSX first adds Wide channels

for the biggest impact on envelopment.

Research in human hearing has proven that

information from the Wide channels is

much more critical in the presentation of a

realistic soundstage than Back Surround

channels found in traditional 7.1 systems.

Audyssey DSX then creates a pair of

Height channels to reproduce the next most

important acoustical and perceptual cues.

In addition to these new Wide and Height

channels, Audyssey DSX applies Surround

Envelopment Processing to enhance the

blend between the front and surround

channels.

Listening Mode Description Input

Source

Speaker

Layout

Neo 6:Neo X C i nema:

Neo X Music:

Neo X Game:

Aud ssey DSXy

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-45

• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Movie +

Audyssey DSX

• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Music +

Audyssey DSX

• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Game +

Audyssey DSX

The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx

and Audyssey DSX® modes can be used.

• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie +

Audyssey DSX

• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music +

Audyssey DSX

The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIx

and Audyssey DSX modes can be used.

The combination of Dolby EX and

Audyssey DSX modes can be used.

THX Founded by George Lucas, THX develops

stringent standards that ensure movies are

reproduced in movie theaters and home

theaters just as the director intended. THX

Modes carefully optimize the tonal and

spatial characteristics of the soundtrack for

reproduction in the home-theater

environment. They can be used with 2-

channel matrixed and multichannel sources.

Surround back speaker output depends on

the source material and the selected listening

mode.

Listening Mode Description Input

Source

Speaker

Layout

PL Mov i e DSX

PL Mus i c DSX

PL Game DSX

PL x Mov i e DSX

PL x Mus i c DSX

PL x Game DSX

Do l by EXDSX

•THX Cinema

THX Cinema mode corrects theatrical

soundtracks for playback in a home theater

environment. In this mode, THX Loudness

Plus is configured for cinema levels and

Re-EQ, Timbre Matching, and Adaptive

Decorrelation are active.

•THX Music

THX Music mode is tailored for listening to

music, which is typically mastered at

significantly higher levels than movies. In

this mode, THX Loudness Plus is

configured for music playback and only

Timbre Matching is active.

•THX Games

THX Games mode is meant for spatially

accurate playback of game audio, which is

often mixed similarly to movies but in a

smaller environment. THX Loudness Plus

is configured for game audio levels, with

Timbre Matching active.

CNM

• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Movie + THX

Cinema

• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Music + THX

Music

• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Game + THX

Games

The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx

and THX Cinema/Music/Games modes can

be used.

The PLII/PLIIx and THX indicators light

on the AV receiver’s display.

SCNM

• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie + THX

Cinema

• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music + THX Music

The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIx

and THX Cinema/Music modes can be

used.

The PLIIx and THX indicators light on the

AV receiver’s display.

Listening Mode Description Input

Source

Speaker

Layout

THX C i nema

Neo 6:THX Mu s i c

THX Game s

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-46

Note

*1 Pure Audio cannot be selected when Zone 2/3 is active.

Besides, if you activate Zone 2/3 while Pure Audio is selected, the listening mode will

automatically switch to Direct.

*2 Based on the audio channel signal contained in the source, the corresponding speakers will output

the sound.

*3 The AV receiver can input the DSD signal from HDMI IN. Depending on the player, setting the

output on the player side to PCM might bring better sound.

*4 For the Blu-ray Discs, Dolby Digital is used in a 3.1/5.1-channel speaker system.

*5 DTS is used depending on the configuration of the AV receiver.

*6 If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used.

*7 If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.

*8 DTS Neo:X cannot be selected in the case of 192 kHz input signals.

*9 This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied:

– Center speaker is connected.

– Either the front high or front wide speakers are connected.

• The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats.

• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX

Cinema

• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX

Music

• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX

Games

The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIz

Height and THX Cinema/Music/Games

modes can be used.

The PLIIz and THX indicators light on the

AV receiver’s display.

• DTS Neo:X Cinema + THX Cinema

• DTS Neo:X Music + THX Music

• DTS Neo:X Game + THX Games

The combination of DTS Neo:X

Cinema/Music/Game and THX Cinema/

Music/Games modes can be used. The

Neo:X indicator lights on the AV

receiver’s display.

• THX Select2 Cinema

This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for

7.1- channel playback. It does this by

analyzing the composition of the surround

source, optimizing the ambient and

directional sounds to produce the surround

back channel output.

• THX Select2 Music

This mode is designed for use with music.

It expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-

channel playback.

• THX Select2 Games

This mode is designed for use with video

games. It can expand 5.1-channel sources

for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.

• THX Surround EX

This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for

6.1/7.1- channel playback. It’s especially

suited to Dolby Digital EX sources. THX

Surround EX, also known as Dolby Digital

Surround EX, is a joint development

between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.

Listening Mode Description Input

Source

Speaker

Layout

Neo 6:

THX S2 C i n ema

THX S2 Music

T H X S 2 G a m e s

THX Su r r EX

• Dolby Pro Logic II Game + THX Select2

Games

The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II

Game and THX Select2 Games modes can

be used. The PLII and THX indicators

light on the AV receiver’s display.

• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX

Select2 Games

The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIz

Height and THX Select2 Cinema/

Music/Games modes can be used.

• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX

Select2 Cinema

• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX

Select2 Music

Listening Mode Description Input

Source

Speaker

Layout

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-47

The Home menu provides quick access to frequently used

menus.

■Network Service

`With this selection, you can use various Internet radio

services or play the contents stored in media connected

to your home network (DLNA) (➔pages 29 to 32).

Note that this selection will be grayed out for a short

while after the AV receiver is turned on. Please wait

until it becomes operable.

Press ENTER to display the network service screen.

If you want to use the Internet radio services, use

q/w/e/r to select the desired service. Pressing

ENTER again switches to that selection. If you want

to play music files on a server, use q/w/e/r to

select “DLNA” and then press ENTER.

■USB

`With this selection, you can play contents of portable

players (iPod, etc.) and USB storage devices connected

to the AV receiver’s USB port (➔pages 28, 29).

Note that this selection will be grayed out for a short

while after the AV receiver is turned on. Please wait

until it becomes operable.

First, press USB repeatedly to select the

“USB(Front)” or “USB(Rear)” input.

Then, press ENTER to select a drive or browse the

contents of the media connected, followed by q/w to

select the desired folder or track. Pressing ENTER as

a track is selected will start playback.

Note

• Only the front-panel USB input is compatible with iPod/iPhone.

■InstaPrevue

`With this selection, you can preview audio/video

streams coming from HDMI inputs (HDMI

IN 1/2/3/4/AUX INPUT). Even with multiple

components connected through HDMI, you can easily

switch between inputs as their previews are displayed

on a single screen.

Press ENTER to display the main preview (currently

selected HDMI input) and the additional previews

(other HDMI inputs). Using q/w or e/r to select a

preview thumbnail and pressing ENTER will switch

the AV receiver to that input source.

■Setup

`With this selection, you can access the common

settings of the on-screen Setup menu.

Press ENTER to display the Setup menu

(➔page 55).

■Firmware Update

`With this selection, you can update the firmware of the

AV receiver. Note that this selection will be grayed out

for a short while after the AV receiver is turned on.

Please wait until it becomes operable.

Press ENTER to start the procedure (➔page 97).

Using the Home Menu

The Home menu appears only on a TV that is

connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is

connected to other video outputs, use the AV

receiver’s display when changing settings.

1Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.

The Home menu will be superimposed on the TV

screen.

Tip

• Alternatively, you can use HOME on the AV receiver.

2Use e/r or q/w and ENTER to make the desired

selection.

Press HOME to close the menu.

You need to connect the AV receiver to your home

network (➔page 107).

Tip

• If no video signals are present, the thumbnails will be filled in

black.

• You can specify the number of preview thumbnails as well as

their positioning on screen (➔page 76).

Note

• This function cannot be selected when:

–HDMI IN 5/6/7 is the current HDMI input source, or

– No signal is present on the current input source.

• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be properly

rendered on the preview thumbnails of InstaPrevue.

Tip

• You can also access frequently used settings from Quick

Setup (➔page 51).

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-48

With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver to turn

off automatically after a specified period.

You can adjust the brightness of the AV receiver’s display,

and switch the MASTER VOLUME indicator off and on

in conjunction.

You can display various information about the current

input source as follows.

The following information can be typically displayed.

*1 If the input signal is digital, the signal format is displayed.

Information is displayed for about three seconds, then the

previously displayed information reappears.

When you connect an u-capable Onkyo component, you

must configure the input display so that u can work

properly.

This setting can be done only from the front panel.

Using the Sleep Timer

1Press RECEIVER once followed by SLEEP

repeatedly to select the required sleep time.

The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10 minutes in 10

minute steps.

The SLEEP indicator lights on the AV receiver’s

display when the sleep timer has been set. The

specified sleep time appears for about 5 seconds, then

the previous display reappears.

Tip

• If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP

repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator goes off.

• To check the time remaining until the AV receiver sleeps,

press SLEEP. Note that if you press again on SLEEP as

the time being displayed is 10 minutes or less, the sleep

timer will go off.

Setting the Display Brightness

1Press RECEIVER once followed by DIMMER

repeatedly to cycle through the following patterns:

• Normal brightness + indicator off.

• Dim brightness + indicator off.

• Dimmer brightness + indicator off.

• Normal brightness + indicator on (default).

Tip

•(North American models) Alternatively, you can use

DIMMER on the AV receiver.

Displaying Source Information

1Press RECEIVER once followed by DISPLAY

repeatedly to cycle through the available

information.

Tip

• Alternatively, you can use DISPLAY on the AV receiver.

Sampling

frequency

Input source

Signal format*1

Listening mode

Input signal

resolution

Output resolution

Changing the Input Display

1Press TV/CD or GAME1.

“TV/CD” or “GAME1” appears on the AV receiver’s

display.

2Press and hold down the same button (about

3 seconds) to change the input display.

Repeat this step to select the desired input display.

Note

“

•“DOCK” can be selected for the “TV/CD”, “GAME1”

input selector, but not at the same time.

• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the

remote controller for the first time (➔page 86).

TV/CD → DOCK

→

TAPE

■TV/CD:

GAME1 ↔ DOCK■GAME1:

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-49

The Whole House Mode is useful when you want to add

extra background music to your home party; this allows

you to enjoy the same stereo music as the main room in

separate rooms (Zone 2/3).

The Whole House Mode selects the same input source for

Multi Zone as the main room’s.

See also:

• “Speaker Setup” (➔page 59)

• “Multi Zone” (➔page 78)

You can set which speakers you want to use by priority.

You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver.

Using the Whole House Mode

1Press WHOLE HOUSE MODE on the front panel.

To cancel the Whole House Mode, change the input

source for the main room or select a listening mode

(➔page 40).

Note

• The Whole House Mode only supports analog audio.

• To adjust the volume of Multi Zone, switch the AV receiver

to Multi Zone control. See “Adjusting the Volume for

Zones” (➔page 80) for the volume adjustment of Multi

Zone.

• The Whole House Mode is not available in the following

cases:

–The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On”

(➔page 75).

–“HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔page 75)

and you’re listening through your TV speakers.

– Digital Processing Crossover Network is used

(➔page 63).

Selecting Speaker Layout

1Press RECEIVER followed by SP (speaker layout)

repeatedly to select:

■9.1 ch playback

`Speaker Layout:SB/FH:

The sounds from surround back and front high

speakers are output by priority.

`Speaker Layout:SB/FW:

The sounds from surround back and front wide

speakers are output by priority.

`Speaker Layout:FH/FW:

The sounds from front high and front wide

speakers are output by priority.

■7.1 ch playback

`Speaker Layout:FH:

The sound from front high speakers is output by

priority.

`Speaker Layout:FW:

The sound from front wide speakers is output by

priority.

`Speaker Layout:SB:

The sound from surround back speakers is

output by priority.

Note

• This setting is not available in either of the following cases:

–The “Speakers Type (Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp”

or “Digital Crossover”.

–The “Powered Zone 2/3” setting is set to “Yes” and

Zone 2/3 is turned on.

Important:

• The following layouts are only available when the

“Preout to External Amplifier” setting (➔page 59)

and all corresponding speakers are enabled.

• Playback conditions may be limited depending on the set-

tings in “Speaker Settings” (➔page 59) and “Speaker

Configuration” (➔page 60).

• When a listening mode which doesn’t support front high,

front wide or surround back speakers is used, this setting

cannot be selected.

Muting the AV Receiver

1Press RECEIVER followed by MUTING.

The output is muted and the MUTING indicator

flashes on the AV receiver’s display.

Tip

• To unmute, press MUTING again or adjust the volume.

• Muting is automatically cancelled when the AV receiver is

set to standby.

Using Headphones

1Connect a pair of stereo headphones with a

standard plug (1/4 inch or 6.3 mm) to the PHONES

jack.

While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES

jack, = indicator lights.

Note

• Always turn down the volume before connecting your

headphones.

• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES

jack, the speakers are turned off. (The Powered Zone 2/3

speakers are not turned off.)

• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening mode

is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo, Mono,

Direct, or Pure Audio.

• If you connect an iPod or iPhone to the USB port on the AV

receiver, no sound will be output from the headphones jack.

Turning On & Basic Operations

En-50

By using ACTIVITIES in Easy macro mode, you can

sequentially operate Onkyo components via simple

commands from a single-button press.

These commands are user-definable. See “Using Normal

Macros” (➔page 90).

■MY MOVIE

First, the TV, the Onkyo DVD player, and the AV receiver

are turned on. The input selector is set to “BD/DVD”.

Finally the player starts playback.*1

*1 Depending on the start-up time of your Blu-ray Disc/DVD

player, the AV receiver may not activate this playback

command. In this case, press 1 on the remote controller.

■MY TV

First, the TV, the cable set-top box, and the AV receiver

are turned on. Then the input selector is set to

“CBL/SAT”.

■MY MUSIC

The Onkyo CD player and the AV receiver are turned on.

The input selector is set to “TV/CD”. Finally, the player

starts playback.

Note

• While the Easy Macro command is being processed, you cannot

use other ACTIVITIES. If you want to operate other components,

first press ALL OFF and use the desired ACTIVITIES.

Turning Off the Components

This button turns off all components activated by the Easy

Macro mode.

First, the related components stop and turn off. Second, the

AV receiver turns off. Finally, the TV turns off (or enters

standby mode).*1*2

*1 This step doesn’t apply to MY MUSIC, with the default

settings.

*2 With some televisions, the power may not be turned off (or

enter standby mode).

Changing the Source Components

You can change the source components activated by the

Easy Macro mode.

Examples:

If you wished to use MY MUSIC to start the Onkyo

cassette recorder, you would press and hold down

MY MUSIC (about 3 seconds) while holding down TV/CD

until it flashes twice.

Restoring Default

You can restore ACTIVITIES to the default settings.

Using Easy Macros

1Press ACTIVITIES (MY MOVIE, MY TV, or

MY MUSIC) to start the Easy macro command.

The default sequences of actions are described below.

To change the related source component, see

“Changing the Source Components” shown later in

this chapter.

1Press ALL OFF.

1While holding down REMOTE MODE for the

playback component you wish to assign, press and

hold down the ACTIVITIES to be changed

(MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC) (about 3

seconds).

ACTIVITIES flashes twice, indicating that the change

is complete.

1While holding down HOME, press and hold down

ALL OFF until ALL OFF lights (about 3 seconds).

2Release HOME and ALL OFF, and press ALL OFF

again.

ALL OFF flashes twice.

En-51

Advanced Operations

On-screen Setup

With the AV receiver connected to a TV, there are two

ways of changing the settings on-screen: using the Quick

Setup or the Setup menu (HOME).

■Quick Setup

The Quick Setup provides quick access to frequently used

settings. You can change settings and view the current

information.

■Setup menu (HOME)

The Setup menu (HOME) provides a convenient way to

change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings are

organized into 9 categories.

Explanatory Notes

a Setting target

b Setting options (default setting underlined)

■Input

`You can select input sources and view the following

information: the name of input selectors, input

assignments, radio information, and ARC function

setting.

In addition, previews of the video streams coming from

HDMI inputs (HDMI IN 1/2/3/4/AUX INPUT) are

displayed.*1

Use q/w to select an input source and view the

related information. Pressing ENTER switches to the

selected input source.

■Audio (➔page 52)

`You can change the following settings: “Sound

Program”, “Bass”, “Treble”, “Subwoofer Level”,

“Center Level”, “Dolby Volume*2”, “Audyssey”,

“Dynamic EQ*2*3”, “Dynamic Volume*2*3”, “Late

Night”, “Music Optimizer”, “Re-EQ”,

“Re-EQ(THX)” and “Screen Centered Dialog”.

■Video*4

`You can change the following settings: “Wide Mode”

and “Picture Mode*5”.

See also:

• “Picture Adjust” (➔page 69)

■Information*6

`You can view the information of the following items:

“Audio”, “Video” and “Tuner”.

■Listening Mode*7

`You can select the listening modes that are grouped in

the following categories: “MOVIE/TV”, “MUSIC”,

“GAME”, and “THX”.

Use q/w to select the category and e/r to select the

listening mode. Press ENTER to switch to the

selected listening mode.

The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is

connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is

connected to other video outputs, use the AV

receiver’s display when changing settings.

This section describes the procedure for using the

remote controller unless otherwise specified.

Using the Quick Setup

1Press RECEIVER followed by QSETUP.

The Quick Setup will be superimposed on the TV

screen.

2Use q/w and ENTER to make the desired selection.

Press Q SETUP to close the menu.

Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.

Q SETUP

RECEIVER

RETURN

ENTER

q/w/e/r

■Music Optimizer

`Off

`On

BD/DVD

Input

Audio

Video

Information

Listening Mode

To be continued

Advanced Operations

En-52

Note

*1 • The video preview is not displayed when:

–HDMI IN 5/6/7 is the current HDMI input source, or

– No signal is present on the current input source.

• The video of the currently-selected input is displayed on the

main screen, not on a preview thumbnail.

*2 “Dolby Volume”, “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume”

cannot be selected when any of the THX listening modes is

selected, with “Loudness Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve

THX Settings” set to “Yes” (➔page 62).

*3 When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On” or “Dynamic Volume”

is set to anything else than “Off”, “Dolby Volume” will be

switched to “Off” (➔page 65).

*4 • When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Sub”, “Video”

cannot be selected (➔page 57).

• This setting cannot be used with the NET input selector.

*5 Only when you have selected “Custom” in the “Picture

Mode” (➔page 70), pressing ENTER allows you to adjust

the following items via the Quick Setup: “Brightness”,

“Contrast”, “Hue” and “Saturation”. Press RETURN to

return to the “Picture Mode” setting.

*6 Depending on the input source and listening mode, not all

channels shown here output the sound.

*7 • This setting is not available in either of the following cases:

–The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔page 75).

–“HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔page 75) and

you’re listening through your TV speakers.

You can change various audio settings from the Quick

Setup (➔page 51).

Note

• These settings are not available in either of the following cases:

–The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔page 75).

–“HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔page 75) and

you’re listening through your TV speakers.

Sound Program

■Sound Program

`Stereo Source 1, Stereo Source 2, Stereo Source 3,

Multich Source 1, Multich Source 2, Multich

Source 3

`Off

With this setting, you can select the combination of

settings that you registered in “Sound Program Edit”

(➔page 66).

Note

• If the input selector is changed, the “Sound Program” setting is

switched back to “Off”.

Tone Control

■Bass

`–10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps

You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds output

from the front speakers.

■Treble

`–10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps

You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds output

from the front speakers.

You can adjust the bass and treble for the front speakers,

except when the Direct, Pure Audio or THX listening

mode is selected.

Operating on the AV receiver

Speaker Levels

■Subwoofer Level

`–15.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps

■Center Level

`–12.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps

You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listening

to an input source.

These temporary adjustments are cancelled when the AV

receiver is set to standby. To save the setting you made

here, go to “Level Calibration” (➔page 61) before

setting the AV receiver to standby.

Note

• You cannot use these function while the AV receiver is muted.

• These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones is

connected.

• Speakers that are set to “No” or “None” in “Speaker

Configuration” (➔page 60) cannot be adjusted.

• When “Sound Program” is enabled, “Subwoofer Level” cannot

be used if the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No” in “Sound

Program Edit”.

Using the Audio Settings of Quick

Setup

1Press TONE repeatedly to select either “Bass” or

“Treble”.

2Use – and + to adjust.

Advanced Operations

En-53

Dolby Volume

■Dolby Volume

See “Dolby Volume” of “Audio Adjust” (➔page 65).

Note

• This setting cannot be used in either of the following cases:

– The Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected.

– Any of the THX listening modes is selected, with “Loudness

Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve THX Settings” set to “Yes”

(➔page 62).

•When “Dolby Volume” is set to “On”, the “Dynamic EQ” and

“Dynamic Volume” settings of all input selectors are switched to

“Off”.

•When “Sound Program” is enabled, the setting must be made

with “Sound Program Edit”.

Audyssey®

■Audyssey

See “Audyssey” in “Source Setup” (➔page 67).

■Dynamic EQ

See “Dynamic EQ” in “Source Setup” (➔page 67).

■Dynamic Volume

See “Dynamic Volume” in “Source Setup” (➔page 68).

Note

• These technologies can be used when all the following conditions

are met:

– Room Correction and Speaker Setup is completed. Note that

“Audyssey” requires the “Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full

Calibration” method.

– Any listening mode other than Direct or Pure Audio is selected.

– A pair of headphones is not connected.

• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.

•“Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” cannot be selected

when any of the THX listening modes is selected, with

“Loudness Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve THX Settings” set to

“Yes” (➔page 62).

•When “Sound Program” is enabled, the setting must be made

with “Sound Program Edit”.

Late Night

■Late Night

For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources, the

options are:

`Off

`Low:

Small reduction in dynamic range.

`High:

Large reduction in dynamic range.

For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options are:

`Auto:

The Late Night function is set to “On” or “Off”

automatically.

`Off

`On

Turn this setting on to reduce the dynamic range of Dolby

Digital material so that you can still hear quiet parts even

when listening at low volume levels—ideal for watching

movies late at night when you don’t want to disturb

anyone.

Note

• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the material that

you are playing and the intention of the original sound designer,

and with some material there will be little or no effect when you

select the different options.

• The Late Night function can be used only when the input source

is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or Dolby TrueHD.

• The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV receiver is

set to standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources, it will be set to

“Auto”.

• With Dolby TrueHD sources, the Late Night function cannot be

used when “TrueHD Loudness Management” is set to “Off”.

• The Late Night function cannot be used when “Dolby Volume”

is set to “On”.

Music Optimizer

■Music Optimizer

`Off

`On

The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound quality

of compressed music files. When set to “On”, the M.Opt

indicator lights on the AV receiver’s display.

Note

• The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital

audio input signals with a sampling rate below 48 kHz and analog

audio input signals.

• The Music Optimizer is disabled when the Direct or Pure Audio

listening mode is selected.

• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.

• When “Sound Program” is enabled, the setting must be made

with “Sound Program Edit”.

Advanced Operations

En-54

Re-EQ

With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a

soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,

making it more suitable for home theater viewing.

■Re-EQ

`Off

`On

This function can be used with the following listening

modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,

Multichannel, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS Express, DSD, Dolby EX,

Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height, Dolby PLIIx Movie, DTS

Neo:X Cinema.

■Re-EQ(THX)

`Off

`On

This function can be used with the following listening

modes: THX Cinema, THX Surround EX, and

THX Select2 Cinema.

Note

• These settings are stored individually for each input selector. In

THX listening mode however, the setting will return to “On”

when the AV receiver is turned off.

• These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones is

connected.

Screen Centered Dialog

By using the front high speaker, this function moves the

center image of dialogs etc. upwards, so that the image of

dialogs is fixed to the display height.

■Screen Centered Dialog

As the value increases, the center image moves upwards.

`1 to 5:

Screen Centered Dialog on.

Note

•The “Screen Centered Dialog” can be used when a compatible

listening mode is selected.

• This setting cannot be used while a pair of headphones is

connected.

Advanced Operations

En-55

Note

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver by

using SETUP, the cursor and enter (middle) buttons.

• During Audyssey MultEQ®XT32 Room Correction and Speaker

Setup, messages, etc., that are displayed on the TV screen will

appear on the AV receiver’s display.

Explanatory Notes

a Main Menu

b Sub Menu

c Setting target

d Setting options (default setting underlined)

Using the Setup Menu (HOME)

1Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.

2Use e/r to select “Setup”, and then press ENTER.

3Use q/w to select a main menu item, and then press

ENTER.

4Use q/w to select a sub menu item, and then press

ENTER.

5Use q/w to select a setting target, and use e/r to

change the setting.

Press HOME to close the menu.

Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.

RETURN

HOME

RECEIVER

ENTER

q/w/e/r

■Screen Saver

If there is no video signal on the current input source and

no operation for a specific time (three minutes by

default), a screen saver automatically comes on.

Tip

• The time until the screen saver activates itself can be changed

in the “Screen Saver” setting (➔page 74).

• The screen will return to its previous state if the AV receiver is

operated.

Main Menu Speaker Setup

Speaker Configuration

■Subwoofer

`Yes

`No

Main Menu

Sub Menu

Advanced Operations

En-56

By way of optimized circuitry, this function reduces power

consumption when the AV receiver is in standby mode.

The HYBRID STANDBY indicator will light in either of

the following conditions:

–“HDMI Through” is enabled (the HDMI indicator is

off).

–“Network Standby” is enabled (the NET indicator is

off).

Note

• If Zones are turned on or, if a mobile device connected to the

Front Input (MHL) is charging, the HYBRID STANDBY

indicator won’t light.

About the HYBRID STANDBY Indicator

HYBRID STANDBY

Setup Menu Items

Main menu item Sub menu item

Input/Output Assign

(➔page 57)

Monitor Out

HDMI Input

Component Video Input

Digital Audio Input

Speaker Setup

(➔page 59)

Speaker Settings

Speaker Configuration

Speaker Distance

Level Calibration

Equalizer Settings

THX Audio Setup

Digital Processing Crossover

Network

Audio Adjust

(➔page 64)

Multiplex/Mono

Dolby

DTS

Audyssey DSX

Theater-Dimensional

LFE Level

Sound Program Edit

Source Setup

(➔page 67)

Audyssey

IntelliVolume

A/V Sync

Name Edit

Picture Adjust

Audio Selector

Listening Mode Preset

(➔page 72)

BD/DVD

CBL/SAT

STB/DVR

GAME1

GAME2

AUX

TUNER

TV/CD

PHONO

NET

USB

Miscellaneous

(➔page 73)

Volume Setup

OSD Setup

Hardware Setup

(➔page 74)

Tuner

HDMI

Auto Standby

Network

Initial Setup

Remote Controller

Setup

(➔page 77)

Remote ID

Remote Mode Setup

Lock Setup

(➔page 77)

Setup

Main menu item Sub menu item

Advanced Operations

En-57

Main Menu Input/Output Assign

Monitor Out

On the “Monitor Out” settings, you can select whether or

not to have the video sources’ images output through the

HDMI output.

If you connect your TV to the HDMI output, the “Monitor

Out” setting is automatically set and composite video and

component video sources are upconverted* and output.

Note

• See “Video Connection Formats” (➔page 101) for charts

showing how the “Monitor Out” and “Resolution” settings

affect the video signal flow through the AV receiver.

■Monitor Out

`Main:

Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT

MAIN.

`Sub:

Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT

SUB.

`Both:

Select this if your TVs are connected to HDMI OUT

MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals are

output from both HDMI outputs at the resolution

supported by both TVs.

Changing the “Monitor Out” setting manually

■Resolution

`Through:

Select this to pass video through the AV receiver at

the same resolution and with no conversion.

`Auto:

Select this to have the AV receiver automatically

convert video at resolutions supported by your TV.

`480p (480p/576p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p:

Select the desired output resolution.

`1080p/24:

Select this for 1080p output at 24 frames per second.

`4K Upscaling:

Select this for an output resolution four times that of

1080p. Depending on the resolution supported by

your TV, it will result in either 3840 × 2160 or 4096

× 2160 pixels.

`Source:

Select this for an output following the resolution level

set in “Picture Adjust” (➔page 69).

You can specify the output resolution for HDMI OUT

MAIN and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture

resolution as necessary to match the resolution supported

by your TV.

Tip

• You can see the picture by pressing ENTER to check the

“Resolution” setting (excluding NET input source).

Note

• Depending on the incoming video signal, the video playback may

not be smooth or the vertical resolution may be lowered. In this

case select anything other than “1080p/24”.

• With some TVs, there may be no picture when this setting is set

to “4K Upscaling”.

• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Sub”, this setting is fixed

to “Through”.

• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both”, this setting is fixed

to “Auto”.

Input/Output Assign

1 2 3 4 5

“Setup”

OUT

Composite video,

component video HDMI

HDMI

Composite video,

component video

1Press MONITOR OUT on the front panel.

The current setting is displayed.

2Press MONITOR OUT on the AV receiver

repeatedly to select:

`HDMI Main, HDMI Sub or Both.

Advanced Operations

En-58

HDMI Input

If you connect a video component to an HDMI input, you

must assign that input to an input selector. For example, if

you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player to HDMI IN 2,

you must assign “HDMI2” to the “BD/DVD” input

selector.

If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an

HDMI cable, composite video and component video

sources can be upconverted* and output by the HDMI

output. You can set this for each input selector by selecting

the “-----” option. See “Video Connection Formats” for

more information on video signal flow and upconversion

(➔page 101).

Here are the default assignments.

■BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,

PC, TV/CD, PHONO

`HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, HDMI5,

HDMI6, HDMI7:

Select the input to which the component has been

connected.

`-----:

Output composite video and component video

sources from the HDMI output. The video output

signal from the HDMI output is the one configured in

“Component Video Input”.

*1 If you connect your personal computer to PC IN (Analog

RGB), you must assign “-----” to the “PC” input selector.

Each HDMI input cannot be assigned to two input selectors

or more. When HDMI1 - HDMI7 have already been

assigned, you must first set any unused input selectors to

“-----” or you will be unable to assign HDMI1 - HDMI7

to other input selectors.

Note

• If no video component is connected to the HDMI output (even if

the HDMI input is assigned), the AV receiver selects the video

source based on the setting of “Component Video Input”.

• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as explained

here, the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority in the “Digital

Audio Input”. In this case, if you want to use the coaxial or

optical audio input, make the appropriate selection in the “Audio

Selector” setting (➔page 72).

• Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector while “HDMI

Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔page 75), otherwise

appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) operation will

not be guaranteed.

• If you assign “-----” to an input selector that is currently

selected in “HDMI Through” (➔page 75), the “HDMI

Through” setting will be automatically switched to “Off”.

•“AUX” is used only for input from the front panel.

Component Video Input

If you connect a video component to a component video

input, you must assign that input to an input selector. For

example, if you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player to

COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2, you must assign “IN2” to

the “BD/DVD” input selector.

Here are the default assignments.

■BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,

PC, AUX, TV/CD, PHONO

`IN1, IN2:

Select the input to which the component has been

connected.

`-----:

Output composite video sources from the HDMI

output.

Input selector Default assignment

BD/DVD HDMI1

CBL/SAT HDMI2

STB/DVR HDMI3

GAME1 HDMI4

GAME2 HDMI5

PC HDMI6*1

AUX FRONT (Fixed)

TV/CD -----

PHONO -----

OUT

Composite video,

component video HDMI

HDMI

Composite video,

component video

Input selector Default assignment

BD/DVD IN1

CBL/SAT IN2

STB/DVR -----

GAME1 -----

GAME2 -----

PC -----

AUX -----

TV/CD -----

PHONO -----

Advanced Operations

En-59

Digital Audio Input

If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you

must assign that input to an input selector. For example, if

you connect your CD player to the OPTICAL IN 1, you

must assign “OPTICAL1” to the “TV/CD” input selector.

Here are the default assignments.

■BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,

PC, TV/CD, PHONO

`COAXIAL1, COAXIAL2, COAXIAL3,

OPTICAL1, OPTICAL2:

Select the input to which the component has been

connected.

`-----:

Select if the component is connected to an analog

audio input.

Note

•When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in

“HDMI Input” (➔page 58), the same HDMI IN will be set as

a priority in this assignment. In this case, if you want to use the

coaxial or optical audio input, make the appropriate selection in

the “Audio Selector” (➔page 72).

• Supported sampling rates for PCM signals (stereo/mono) from a

digital input (optical and coaxial) are 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz/16,

20, 24 bit.

•“AUX” is used only for input from the front panel.

Main Menu Speaker Setup

Here you can check the settings made by

Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker

Setup function, or set them manually, which is useful if

you change one of the connected speakers after using

Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker

Setup function.

Speaker Settings

If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but less

than 6, set the minimum speaker impedance to 4 ohms.

If you bi-amp the front speakers, you must change the

“Speakers Type (Front)” setting. For details on speaker

wire connection, see “Bi-amping the Front Speakers”

(➔page 16). When connecting speakers without

crossover network, you need to change the “Speakers

Type (Front)” setting beforehand. For details on

connection, refer to “Using Speakers Without Crossover

Network” (➔page 17).

Note

• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to drive up to 5.1

speakers in the main room.

• Before you change these settings, turn down the volume.

■Speaker Impedance

`4ohms:

Select if the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or

more but less than 6.

`6ohms:

Select if the impedances of all speakers are between 6

and 16 ohms.

■Speakers Type (Front)

`Normal:

Select this if you’ve connected your front speakers

normally.

`Bi-Amp:

Select this if you’ve bi-amped your front speakers.

`Digital Crossover:

Select this if you’re using speakers without crossover

network.

Tip

• If “Speakers Type (Front)” is set to “Digital Crossover”, a

confirmation screen appears. Select “Next (2-7. Digital

Processing Crossover Network)” to display the screen for

Digital Processing Crossover Network (➔page 63). Continue

with the settings.

■Powered Zone 2, Powered Zone 3

`No

`Yes:

Zone 2/3 speakers can be used. (Powered Zone 2/3

enabled).

■Preout to External Amplifier

`No

`Surr Back, Front High, Front Wide

For 9.1-channel playback, select the channel output by

SB/FH/FW EXT AMP jacks. If you select speakers whose

setting in Speaker Configuration is set to “None”, it will be

automatically switched to “80Hz (THX)”.

Input selector Default assignment

BD/DVD COAXIAL1

CBL/SAT COAXIAL2

STB/DVR COAXIAL3

GAME1 OPTICAL1

GAME2 -----

PC -----

AUX FRONT (Fixed)

TV/CD OPTICAL2

PHONO -----

Speaker Setup

Some of the settings in this section are set automatically

by Audyssey MultEQ®XT32 Room Correction and

Speaker Setup (➔page 37).

If you change these settings, you must run

Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and

Speaker Setup again (➔page 37).

1 2 3 4 5

“Setup”

To be continued

Advanced Operations

En-60

Note

• If the “Speakers Type (Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or

“Digital Crossover”, Powered Zone 2 cannot be used.

•When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2

is turned on, the surround back and front high speakers cannot be

used.

• If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “No”, the “Powered

Zone 3” setting cannot be selected.

•“Preout to External Amplifier” is not available in either of the

following cases:

–The “Speakers Type (Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or

“Digital Crossover”.

–The “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes”.

Speaker Configuration

With these settings, you can specify which speakers are

connected and a crossover frequency for each speaker.

Specify “Full Band” for speakers that can output low

frequency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers

with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify a

crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover

frequency will be output by the subwoofer instead of the

speaker. Refer to your speaker’s manuals to determine the

optimum crossover frequencies. If you set up your

speakers using Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction

and Speaker Setup, please make sure manually that any

THX speakers are set to “80Hz(THX)” crossover.

■Subwoofer

`Yes

`No

■Front

`Full Band

`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz

Note

• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, the “Front” setting is

fixed at “Full Band”.

■Center*1, Surround*1*2

`Full Band

`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz

`None

■Front Wide*1*3*4*6*8, Front High*1*3*5*6*7*8

`Full Band

`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz

`None

■Surround Back*1*2*3*5*6*8

`Full Band

`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz

`None

Note

*1 “Full Band” can be selected only when “Full Band” is

selected in the “Front” setting.

*2 When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes” and

Zone 3 is turned on, this setting cannot be selected.

*3 This setting cannot be selected if the “Speakers Type

(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or “Digital Crossover”.

*4 When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes”, this

setting cannot be selected.

*5 When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and

Zone 2 is turned on, this setting cannot be selected.

*6 If the “Surround” setting is set to “None”, this setting cannot

be selected.

*7 When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes”, this

setting cannot be selected.

*8 If the “Preout to External Amplifier” setting is enabled for

these speakers, “None” cannot be selected.

■Surround Back Ch

`1ch:

Select if only one surround back speaker L is

connected.

`2ch:

Select if two (left and right) surround back speakers

are connected.

Note

• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None”, this setting

cannot be selected.

■LPF of LFE

(Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel)

`80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz

`Off:

Low-Pass Filter is not applied.

With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of

the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be

used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to

sources that use the LFE channel.

Note

• If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “80Hz”.

■Subwoofer Phase

`0º

`180º:

Moves the subwoofer phase.

Note

• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot be

selected.

This setting is set automatically by

Audyssey MultEQ®XT32 Room Correction and

Speaker Setup (➔page 37).

Advanced Operations

En-61

■Double Bass

`On

`Off(THX)

Turn this setting on to boost bass output by feeding bass

sounds from the front left, right, and center channels to

the subwoofer.

Note

•When the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No” or the “Front”

setting to anything other than “Full Band”, this setting is fixed to

“-----”.

• This setting is set to “On” automatically when the “Subwoofer”

and “Front” settings are set for the first time to “Yes” and “Full

Band” respectively.

• If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “Off(THX)”.

Speaker Distance

Here you can specify the distance from each speaker to the

listening position so that the sound from each speaker

arrives at the listener’s ears as the sound designer intended.

■Unit

`feet:

Distances can be set in feet. Range: 0.5ft to 30.0ft in

0.5 foot steps.

`meters:

Distances can be set in meters. Range: 0.15m to

9.00m in 0.15 meter steps.

(The default setting varies from country to country.)

■Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center,

Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right,

Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround

Back Left, Surround Left, Subwoofer

`Specify the distance from each speaker to your

listening position.

Note

• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in “Speaker

Configuration” cannot be selected (➔page 60).

• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2

is turned on, the surround back and front high speakers cannot be

used.

• When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 3

is turned on, the surround and surround back speakers cannot be

used.

Level Calibration

Here you can adjust the level of each speaker with the

built-in test tone so that the volume of each speaker is the

same at the listening position.

Note

• These settings cannot be calibrated in either of the following

cases:

–The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔page 75).

–“HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔page 75) and

you’re listening through your TV speakers.

– The AV receiver is muted.

■Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center*1,

Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right,

Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround

Back Left, Surround Left

`–12.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps.

■Subwoofer*1

`–15.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps.

Note

• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in “Speaker

Configuration” cannot be selected (➔page 60).

• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2

is turned on, the surround back and front high speakers cannot be

used.

• When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 3

is turned on, the surround and surround back speakers cannot be

used.

• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX, which is

0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you normally listen at

volume settings below this, be careful because the test tone will

be much louder.

*1 For the center speaker and subwoofer, the level settings made

by using the Quick Setup are saved in this menu (➔page 52).

Tip

• If you’re using a handheld sound level meter, adjust the level of

each speaker so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listening position,

measured with C-weighting and slow reading.

This setting is NOT set automatically by

Audyssey MultEQ®XT32 Room Correction and

Speaker Setup (➔page 37).

This setting is set automatically by

Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker

Setup (➔page 37).

This setting is set automatically by

Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker

Setup (➔page 37).

Advanced Operations

En-62

Equalizer Settings

With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of

speakers individually with a 7-band equalizer. The volume

of each speaker can be set (➔page 61).

■Manual Equalizer

`On:

You can adjust the equalizer for each speaker

manually. Continue with the following procedure:

`Off:

Tone off, response flat.

Note

• When the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the

equalizer settings have no effect.

• If “Audyssey” is enabled, it prevails over this setting

(➔page 67).

THX Audio Setup

■Surr Back Speaker Spacing

`<1ft (<0.3m)

`1ft-4ft (0.3m-1.2m)

`>4ft (>1.2m)

You can specify the distance between your surround back

speakers.

Note

• This setting is not available in any of the following cases:

–“Surround Back” is set to “None” (➔page 60).

–“Surround Back Ch” is set to “1ch” (➔page 60).

–“Powered Zone 2/3” is set to “Yes” (➔page 59) and

Zone 2/3 is turned on (➔page 79).

■THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer

`No

`Yes

If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set this setting

to “Yes”.

Note

• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot be

selected (➔page 60).

■BGC

`Off

`On

You can apply THX’s Boundary Gain Compensation

(BGC) to compensate the perceived exaggeration of low

frequencies for listeners sitting very close to a room

boundary (i.e., wall).

Note

• This setting is only available if “THX Ultra2/Select2

Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.

• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot be

selected (➔page 60).

■Loudness Plus

`Off

`On

When the “Loudness Plus” setting is set to “On”, it is

possible to enjoy even subtle nuances of audio expression

at low volume. This is only available when the THX

listening mode is selected.

■Preserve THX Settings

`Yes

`No

If this setting is set to “Yes”, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic

Volume and Dolby Volume have no effect in THX

listening mode.

Note

• This setting is fixed at “Yes” if “Loudness Plus” is set to “On”.

■Metadata Compatible

`On:

When Metadata Compatible is set to “On”, valid

metadata is transmitted via the HDMI connections,

and can be used by other devices in the system.

`Off:

When Metadata Compatible is set to “Off”, metadata

is not transmitted via the HDMI connections.

The HDMI connection in your system is used to deliver

uncompressed digital audio and video information from

one device to the next. There is also additional information

about this digital content that can be delivered. Such

additional information is referred to as “metadata”.

Metadata Compatible mode should be used when there are

home theater components in your system, such as Blu-ray

disc players, set top boxes and displays that use this

additional metadata. For example, Metadata Compatible

mode should be set to ON when there are THX Media

Director™ Enabled devices in the system. This ensures

that this additional information can be received by your

Onkyo AVR and can be sent to other devices that are

connected in your home theater system, with no

interruption.

1Press w to select “Channel”, and then use e/r to

select a speaker.

2Use q/w to select a frequency, and then use the e/r

to adjust the level at that frequency.

The volume at each frequency can be adjusted from

–6dB to 0dB to +6dB in 1 dB steps.

Tip

• You can select: “63Hz”, “160Hz”, “400Hz”, “1000Hz”,

“2500Hz”, “6300Hz”, or “16000Hz”. And for the

subwoofer, “25Hz”, “40Hz”, “63Hz”, “100Hz”, or

“160Hz”.

• Low frequencies (e.g., 63Hz) affect bass sounds; high

frequencies (e.g., 16000Hz) affect treble sounds.

3Use q to select “Channel”, and then use e/r to

select another speaker.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each speaker.

You cannot select speakers that you set to “No” or

“None” in the “Speaker Configuration”

(➔page 60).

Advanced Operations

En-63

Digital Processing Crossover Network

Digital Crossover provides a separate routing system by

splitting the audio signal into separate frequency bands

optimized for each speaker driver. It provides a fine, three-

dimensional sound field that extend each driver’s

performance to the uppermost. With its built-in time

alignment function, this system also adjusts the sound

shifting that occurs when there is a physical offset between

sound drivers. At a digital processing level, it corrects this

offset by delaying the related audio signal.

Although this function is meant for speakers without

crossover network, it can also be used with bi-amped

speakers.

In this case, set the crossover network on the AV receiver

as the speakers’ built-in network frequency is not used.

Tip

• This setting can be done while listening to an audio source.

• Press MODE/D (Blue) to switch from the current audio source to

test noises. Pressing MODE/D (Blue) again or the cursor buttons

will stop the test noises and switch back to the original audio

source.

Note

• This setting can only be made when “Speakers Type (Front)” is

set to “Digital Crossover” (➔page 59).

■Crossover

`“250Hz”, “320Hz”, “400Hz”, “500Hz, “630Hz”,

“800Hz”, “1000Hz”, “1250Hz”, “1600Hz”,

“2000Hz”, “2500Hz”, “3200Hz”, “4000Hz”,

“5000Hz”

Output Band for Test

`High + Low, High, Low:

Select the output for the audio signal.

Tip

• Pressing MODE/D (Blue) button plays band-limited test noises

which center on the specified frequency.

• We recommend choosing a crossover value that creates no

volume difference between “High” and “Low”.

Note

• Refer to your speaker manual when setting without the use of test

noises.

■Overlap

`No

`Yes

With this setting, a frequency band near the specified

crossover frequency is output by both tweeters and

woofers. Based on the frequency selected for “Crossover”,

the cutoff frequency of the low-pass filter (LPF) will be set

to 1/3 octave up and that of the high-pass filter (HPF) to

1/3 octave down. Example: With a “Crossover” of

“3200Hz”, the cutoff frequency of the woofers’ LPF will

be “4000Hz”, and the tweeters’ HPF will be “2500Hz”.

Tip

• Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover Network are

played.

• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises by

pressing MODE/D (Blue).

■High Level, Low Level

`–6.0dB to 0.0dB to +6.0dB in 0.5 dB steps

With this setting, you can set the volume of tweeters and

woofers.

Tip

• Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover Network are

played.

• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises by

pressing MODE/D (Blue).

■High Phase, Low Phase

`0º

`180º:

With this setting, you can adjust the phase of tweeters and

woofers.

Tip

• Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover Network are

played.

• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises by

pressing MODE/D (Blue).

THX Loudness Plus

THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology

featured in THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™

Certified receivers. With THX Loudness Plus, home

theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a

surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of

turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain

sound elements can be lost or perceived differently by

the listener. THX Loudness Plus compensates for the

tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is

reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround

channel levels and frequency response. This enables

users experience the true impact of soundtracks

regardless of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is

automatically applied when listening in any THX

listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and

THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX

Loudness Plus settings for each type of content.

Cutoff frequencies of the woofers’ low-pass filter (LPF)

and the tweeters’ high-pass filter (HPF) are set according

to the frequency specified for “Crossover”.

Advanced Operations

En-64

■High Distance, Low Distance

`0inch(0.0cm) to 12inch(30.0cm) in 1 inch(2.5 cm)

steps

With this setting, you can adjust the virtual position of

tweeter and woofer units. Adjusting “High Distance”

virtually shifts woofers behind tweeters. Adjusting “Low

Distance” virtually shifts tweeters behind woofers.

Tip

• Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover Network are

played.

• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises by

pressing MODE/D (Blue).

Main Menu Audio Adjust

With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can

adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.

Multiplex/Mono

■Multiplex

Input Channel

`Main

`Sub

`Main/Sub

This setting determines which channel of a stereo

multiplex source is output. Use it to select audio channels

or languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV

broadcasts, and so on.

■Mono

Input Channel

`Left + Right

`Left

`Right

This setting specifies the channel to be used for playing

any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby Digital, or 2-

channel analog/PCM source in the Mono listening mode.

Output Speaker

`Center:

Mono audio is output by the center speaker.

`Left / Right:

Mono audio is output by the front left and right

speakers.

This setting determines which speakers output mono audio

when the Mono listening mode is selected.

Note

• If the “Center” setting is set to “None” (➔page 60), this setting

cannot be selected.

Dolby

■PL IIx Music (2ch Input)

These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.

If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these

settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro Logic

IIx.

Panorama

`On

`Off

With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front

stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

listening mode.

Dimension

`–3 to 0 to +3

With this setting, you can move the sound field forward or

backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

listening mode. Higher settings move the sound field

backward. Lower settings move it forward.

If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much

surround sound, move the sound field forward to improve

the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image feels like it’s

in mono, or there’s not enough surround sound, move it

backward.

(Low Distance)

Tweeter

Woofer

(High Distance)

Distance Distance

Audio Adjust

1 2 3 4 5

“Setup”

Advanced Operations

En-65

Center Width

`0 to 3 to 7

With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound

from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic

IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a

center speaker, the center channel sound is output from

only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center

speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to the

front left and right speakers to create a phantom center).

This setting controls the front left, right, and center mix,

allowing you to adjust the weight of the center channel

sound.

■PL IIz Height Gain

`Low

`Mid

`High

The Height Gain Control in Dolby Pro Logic IIz enables

the listener to select how much gain is applied to the front

high speakers. There are three settings, “Low”, “Mid” and

“High”, and the front high speakers are accentuated in that

order. While “Mid” is the default listening setting, the

listener may adjust the Height Gain Control to their

personal preference.

Note

• If the “Front High” setting is set to “None” (➔page 60), this

setting cannot be selected.

• If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2 is

turned on, this setting cannot be selected.

■Dolby EX

`Auto:

If the source signal contains a Dolby EX flag, the

Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening mode is

used.

`Manual:

You can select any available listening mode.

This setting determines how Dolby EX encoded signals are

handled. This setting is unavailable if no surround back

speakers are connected. This setting is effective with

Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD only.

Note

• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None” (➔page 60),

this setting cannot be selected.

• If the “Powered Zone 2/3” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2/3 is

turned on, this setting cannot be selected.

■TrueHD Loudness Management

`Off

`On

This setting specifies whether or not to apply the Late

Night processing on a Dolby TrueHD source.

Note

• When this setting is set to “Off”, the Late Night function for

Dolby TrueHD sources is automatically fixed to “Off”.

• When this setting is set to “Off”, the Dialogue Normalization

information is not available for Dolby TrueHD sources.

■Dolby Volume

`Off

`On

Dolby Volume automatically adjusts the difference in

volume levels which can occur between different contents

or source components, freeing the user from having to

make volume adjustments. Also, by adjusting the

frequency balance according to the playback volume, it

recreates the original source audio. Dolby Volume

therefore provides comfortable listening, effectively

controlling the volume level difference without unnatural

changes in volume or sound quality to recreate the balance

and nuance of the source audio.

Note

• When the “Dolby Volume” setting is set to “On”,

“Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” will be set to “Off”.

• If you would like to use Dolby Volume in THX listening modes,

set the “Loudness Plus” and “Preserve THX Settings” settings

to “Off” and “No”, respectively.

• When “Dolby Volume” is set to “On”, the Late Night function

cannot be set.

■Volume Leveler

`Off

`Low:

Low Compression Mode activated.

`Mid:

Medium Compression Mode activated.

`High:

High Compression Mode activated. This setting

affects volume the most, causing all sounds to be of

equal loudness.

“Volume Leveler” maintains the perceived loudness of all

contents, coming from different channels or input sources.

Note

• If the “Dolby Volume” setting is set to “Off”, this setting cannot

be selected.

■Half Mode

`Off

`On

The Half Mode parameter turns Dolby Volume Half Mode

processing on and off.

In off mode, Dolby Volume applies a bass and treble

attenuation to the audio when the system gain exceeds

reference level. This enables a more perceptually flat

listening experience as human ears are more sensitive to

bass and treble at higher levels. Some listeners however,

prefer to have more bass and treble performance at higher

gain levels.

Note

• If the “Dolby Volume” setting is set to “Off”, this setting cannot

be selected.

• During Half Mode on playback, Dolby Volume does not apply a

bass and treble attenuation when the system volume exceeds

reference level, thereby boosting perception of high and low

frequencies.

Advanced Operations

En-66

DTS

■Neo:X Music

Center Image

`0 to 2 to 5

The DTS Neo:X Music listening mode creates 9-channel

surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this

setting, you can specify by how much the front left and

right channel output is attenuated in order to create the

center channel.

Changing the value from “0” to “5” will spread the sound

of the center channel to left and right (outwards).

Audyssey DSX®

■Soundstage

`–3dB to Reference to +3dB

With this setting, you can adjust the sound stage when using

Audyssey DSX.

Note

• This listening mode can be selected only when all the following

conditions are satisfied:

– The center speaker is connected.

– Either the front high or front wide speakers are connected.

– Powered Zone 2 is not in use.

Theater-Dimensional

■Listening Angle

`Wide:

Select if the listening angle is greater than 30 degrees.

`Narrow:

Select if the listening angle is less than 30 degrees.

With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-

Dimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of the

front left and right speakers relative to the listening

position. Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be

equidistant from the listening position and at an angle close

to one of the two available settings.

Note

• For best results, we recommend setting “Narrow” to 20° and

“Wide” to 40°.

LFE Level

■Dolby Digital*1, DTS*2, Multich PCM, Dolby

TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DSD*3

`–QdB, –20dB, –10dB, or 0dB

With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE (Low

Frequency Effects) channel individually for each input

sources.

If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when

using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB or

–Q dB.

*1 Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources

*2 DTS and DTS-HD High Resolution sources

*3 DSD (Super Audio CD) sources

Sound Program Edit

■Sound Program

`Stereo Source 1, Stereo Source 2, Stereo Source 3,

Multich Source 1, Multich Source 2, Multich

Source 3

When playing back different content types on the same

source, or when listening to a single content type on

different sources, you can pre-register the settings that best

suit each content in “Sound Program”. The registered

settings can then be called up and modified in one set. Use

“Sound Program Edit” to register and modify a

combination of settings.

Tip

• To select the registered settings, see “Sound Program”

(➔page 52).

■Listening Mode

You can assign a default listening mode that will be

selected automatically when you select the sound program.

The “Last Valid” option means that the listening mode

selected last will be used.

Dialogue Normalization

Dialogue Normalization (DialogNorm) is a feature of

Dolby Digital, which is used to keep the programs at the

same average listening level so the user does not have to

change the volume control between Dolby Digital,

Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD programs. When

playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby

Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD,

sometimes you may see a brief message in the front

panel display which will read “DialogNorm: X dB” (X

being a numeric value). The display is showing how the

program level relates with THX calibration level. If you

want to play the program at calibrated theatrical levels,

you may wish to adjust the volume. For example, if you

see the following message: “DialogNorm: + 4 dB” in

the front panel display, to keep the overall output level at

THX calibrated loudness, just turn down the volume

control by 4 dB. However, unlike a movie theater where

the playback loudness is preset, you can choose your

preferred volume setting for best enjoyment.

Front left speaker Front right speaker

Listening angle: 30°

To be continued

Advanced Operations

En-67

The “Straight Decode” option means that straight

decoding listening mode (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) is

selected.

■Subwoofer

`No, Yes

You can choose whether or not to use the subwoofer with

the sound program.

■Music Optimizer*1

`Off, On

See “Music Optimizer” (➔page 53).

■Equalizer*1

`Off

`Manual:

The manual setting in “Equalizer Settings”

(➔page 62) is applied.

■Audyssey*1

`Off, Movie, Music

See “Audyssey” (➔page 53).

■Dynamic EQ*1*2

`Off, On

See “Dynamic EQ” (➔page 53).

■Dynamic Volume*1*2

`Off, Light, Medium, Heavy

See “Dynamic Volume” (➔page 53).

■Dolby Volume*1

`Off, On

See “Dolby Volume” (➔page 53).

Note

• You cannot select the “Subwoofer” setting if you set it to “No”

in “Speaker Configuration”.

•“Music Optimizer” is only available when “Stereo Source 1”,

“Stereo Source 2” or “Stereo Source 3” is selected.

•When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for measurement,

the “Audyssey”setting cannot be selected.

*1 This setting cannot be used when the “Listening Mode”

setting is set to “Pure Audio” or “Direct”.

*2 To enable this setting, you must first perform the Room

Correction and Speaker Setup.

Main Menu Source Setup

Items can be set individually for each input selector.

Audyssey®

■Audyssey

`Off

`Movie:

Select this setting for movie material.

The Audyssey indicator will light.

`Music:

Select this setting for music material.

The Audyssey indicator will light.

Note

• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for measurement,

“Audyssey” cannot be selected.

• Audyssey equalizing does not work with DSD sources.

■Dynamic EQ

`Off

`On:

Audyssey Dynamic EQ® becomes active.

The Dynamic EQ indicator will light.

With Audyssey Dynamic EQ, you can enjoy great sound

even when listening at low volume levels.

Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating

sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into

account human perception and room acoustics. It does so

by selecting the correct frequency response and surround

volume levels moment-by-moment so that the content

sounds the way it was created at any volume level — not

just at reference level.

■Reference Level

Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset

`0dB:

This should be selected for movie contents.

`5dB:

Select this setting for content that has a very wide

dynamic range, such as classical music.

`10dB:

Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a

wider dynamic range. This setting should also be

selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at

10 dB below film reference.

`15dB:

Select this setting for pop/rock music or other

program material that is mixed at very high listening

levels and has a compressed dynamic range.

Source Setup

Preparation

Press the input selector buttons to select an input source.

The tone for each speaker is set automatically by

Audyssey MultEQ®XT32 Room Correction and

Speaker Setup. To enable the following settings, you

must first perform the Room Correction and Speaker

Setup (➔page 37).

• These technologies cannot be used when:

–a pair of headphones is connected, or

–either Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected.

1 2 3 4 5

“Setup”

To be continued

Advanced Operations

En-68

Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film reference.

To achieve the same reference level in a home theater

system each speaker level must be adjusted so that

–30 dBFS band-limited (500 Hz to 2000 Hz) pink noise

produces 75 dB sound pressure level at the listening

position. A home theater system automatically calibrated

by Audyssey MultEQ®XT32 will play at reference level

when the master volume control is set to the 0 dB position.

At that level you can hear the mix as the mixers heard it.

Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is referenced to the standard film

mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the reference

response and surround envelopment when the volume is

turned down from 0 dB. However, film reference level is

not always used in music or other non-film content.

Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides

three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB,

and 15 dB) that can be selected when the mix level of the

content is not within the standard.

Note

• If “Dynamic EQ” setting is set to “Off”, this technology cannot

be used.

■Dynamic Volume

`Off

`Light:

Activates Light Compression Mode.

`Medium:

Activates Medium Compression Mode.

`Heavy:

Activates Heavy Compression Mode. This setting

affects volume the most. It quiets the loud parts, such

as explosions, and boosts the quiet parts so they can

be heard.

Note

• If you want to use Audyssey Dynamic EQ or

Audyssey Dynamic Volume® with THX listening modes, set the

“Loudness Plus” setting to “Off” and set “Preserve THX

Settings” to “No” (➔page 62).

• If you make Dynamic Volume active, “Dynamic EQ” is set to

“On”. The Dynamic Vol indicator will light.

• When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “Off”, “Dynamic Volume” is

automatically switched to “Off”.

IntelliVolume

■IntelliVolume

`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.

With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each

input selector individually. This is useful if one of your

source components is louder or quieter than the others.

Use e/r to set the level.

If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use e

to reduce its input level. If it’s noticeably quieter, use r to

increase its input level.

Note

• IntelliVolume does not work for Zone 2/3.

A/V Sync

■A/V Sync

`0msec to 800msec in 5 msec steps

When using progressive scanning on your Blu-ray

Disc/DVD player, you may find that the picture and sound

are out of sync. With this setting, you can correct this by

delaying the audio signals.

To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press

ENTER.

To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

The range of values you can adjust will depend on whether

your TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync and if the

“Lip Sync” setting is set to “On” or not (➔page 76).

Note

• A/V Sync is disabled when the Pure Audio or Direct listening

mode is used with an analog input source.

• This setting cannot be used with the NET input selector.

About Audyssey Dynamic EQ®

Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of

deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by

taking into account human perception and room

acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency

response and surround levels moment-by-moment at any

user-selected volume setting. The result is bass response,

tonal balance and surround impression that remain

constant despite changes in volume. Dynamic EQ

combines information from incoming source levels with

actual output sound levels in the room, a prerequisite for

delivering a loudness correction solution.

About Audyssey Dynamic Volume®

Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large

variations in volume level between television programs,

commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of

movies. Dynamic Volume looks at the preferred volume

setting by the user and then monitors how the volume of

program material is being perceived by listeners in real

time to decide whether an adjustment is needed.

Whenever necessary, Dynamic Volume makes the

necessary rapid or gradual adjustments to maintain the

desired playback volume level while optimizing the

dynamic range. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into

Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is

adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response,

tonal balance, surround impression and dialog clarity

remain the same whether watching movies, flipping

between television channels or changing from stereo to

surround sound content.

Advanced Operations

En-69

Name Edit

You can enter a custom name for each individual input

selector and radio preset for easy identification. When

entered, the custom name will appear on the display.

The custom name is edited using the keyboard screen.

■Name

Tip

• To name a radio preset, use TUNER to select AM or FM, and

then select the preset (➔page 34).

• To restore a name to its default, erase all characters with CLR,

select “OK” and then press ENTER.

Note

• This setting cannot be used for the NET and USB input selectors.

Picture Adjust

Using Picture Adjust, you can adjust the picture quality

and reduce any noise appearing on the screen.

To view the TV picture while setting, press ENTER. To

return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

■Wide Mode*1*2

This setting determines the aspect ratio.

`4:3:

`Full:

`Zoom:

`Wide Zoom:

`Auto:

According to the input signals and monitor output

setting, the AV receiver automatically selects the

“4:3”, “Full”, “Zoom” or “Wide Zoom” mode. See

“Monitor Out” for details on the monitor output

setting (➔page 57).

1Use q/w/e/r to select a character, and then

press ENTER.

Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters.

2To store a name when you’re done, be sure to

select “OK” by using q/w/e/r, and then press

ENTER.

BD/DVD

Shift All Erase

4-4. Name Edit

Name

+10 CLR

a b c d e f g h i j k l m

n o p q r s t u v w x y z

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 – ^ \

Space

Back Space

Shift OK

, . / ; : @ [ ]

Space

Back Space

Shift OK

A B C D E F G H I J K L M

N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

+ ? ` { } < >

! ˝ # $ % & ’ ) ( _ = | ˜

Name input area

Space:

Enters a space character.

Shift*1:

Toggles between lower and upper case characters.

(Left)/ (Right):

Moves the cursor left or right in the Name input

area.

Back Space*2:

Moves the cursor backward and deletes one

character.

OK:

Confirms your entry.

Tip

*1 This can also be performed by using +10 on the remote

controller.

*2 Press CLR on the remote controller to delete all the

characters you have input.

Advanced Operations

En-70

■Picture Mode*1*3

`Custom:

All settings can be performed manually.

`ISF Day:

Select when the room is bright.

`ISF Night:

Select when the room is dark.

`Cinema:

Select when the picture source is a movie or alike.

`Game:

Select when the video source is a game console.

`Streaming:

Attempts to reduce the mosquito noise and block

artifact effects.

`Through:

Does not adjust picture quality (changes resolution).

`Direct:

Does not adjust picture quality (does not change

resolution). The video coming from an analog input

and output by the HDMI output is processed in the

same way as “Through”.

With “Picture Mode”, you can change the following

settings to be suitable for the movie or game screen by one

operation; “Game Mode”, “Film Mode”, “Edge

Enhancement”, “Noise Reduction”, “Mosquito NR”,

“Random NR”, “Block NR”, “Resolution”,

“Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Hue”, “Saturation”, “Color

Temperature”, “Gamma”, “Red Brightness”, “Red

Contrast”, “Green Brightness”, “Green Contrast”,

“Blue Brightness” or “Blue Contrast”.

The receiver has been designed to incorporate setup and

calibration standards established by the Imaging Science

Foundation (ISF). The ISF has developed carefully crafted,

industry-recognized standards for optimal video

performance and has implemented a training program for

technicians and installers to use these standards to obtain

optimal picture quality from the receiver. Accordingly,

Onkyo recommends that setup and calibration be

performed by an ISF Certified installation technician.

■Game Mode*4*5*6

`Off

`On

If video signal delay occurs during playback on a video

component (i.e., game console), select the corresponding

input source and set the “Game Mode” setting to “On”.

The delay will decrease but in return the picture quality will

become poor.

■Film Mode*4*6

`Video:

“Film Mode” detection is not applied and the input

signal is handled as a video source.

`Auto:

Detects whether the input signal is a video or a

movie. If it is a movie, the appropriate conversion is

applied.

The AV receiver will adjust to the picture source,

automatically converting it to the appropriate progressive

signal and reproducing the natural quality of the original

picture.

■Edge Enhancement*4*6

`Off

`Low

`Mid

`High

With this setting, you can make the picture appear sharper.

■Noise Reduction*4*6

`Off

`Low

`Mid

`High

With this setting, you can reduce noise appearing on the

screen. Select the desired level.

■Mosquito NR*4*6*7

`Off

`Low

`Mid

`High

With Mosquito Noise Reduction, you can remove the

shimmering or haziness that sometimes appears around

objects in the picture. Mosquito noise can be an issue with

overly compressed MPEG content.

■Random NR*4*6*7

`Off

`Low

`Mid

`High

With Random Noise Reduction, you can remove

indiscriminate picture noise, such as film grain.

■Block NR*4*6*7

`Off

`Low

`Mid

`High

With Block Noise Reduction, you can remove the block

distortion that sometimes appears in the picture. Block

noise can be an issue with overly compressed MPEG

content.

Advanced Operations

En-71

■Resolution*4*6*8

`Through:

Select this to pass video through the AV receiver at

the same resolution and with no conversion.

`Auto:

Select this to have the AV receiver automatically

convert video at resolutions supported by your TV.

`480p (480p/576p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p:

Select the desired output resolution.

`1080p/24:

Select this for 1080p output at 24 frames per second.

`4K Upscaling:

Select this for an output resolution four times that of

1080p. Depending on the resolution supported by

your TV, it will result in either 3840 × 2160 or 4096

× 2160 pixels.

You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI output

and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture resolution

as necessary to match the resolution supported by your TV.

This setting is available only when “Source” has been

selected in “Resolution” of the “Monitor Out” setting

(➔page 57).

■Brightness*1*4*6

`–50 to 0 to +50

With this setting, you can adjust the picture brightness.

“–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.

■Contrast*1*4*6

`–50 to 0 to +50

With this setting, you can adjust contrast. “–50” is the

least. “+50” is the greatest.

■Hue*1*4*6

`–50 to 0 to +50

With this setting, you can adjust the color hue between

“–50” and “+50”.

■Saturation*1*4*6

`–50 to 0 to +50

With this setting, you can adjust saturation. “–50” is the

weakest color. “+50” is the strongest color.

■Color Temperature*4*6

`Warm

`Normal

`Cool

With this setting, you can adjust the color temperature.

■Gamma*4*6

`–3 to 0 to +3

With this setting, you can adjust the incoming picture’s R

(red), G (green), and B (blue) color signal in relation to the

output color signal.

■Red Brightness*4*6

`–50 to 0 to +50

With this setting you can adjust the brightness of red color.

“–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.

■Red Contrast*4*6

`–50 to 0 to +50

With this setting you can adjust the contrast of red color.

“–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.

■Green Brightness*4*6

`–50 to 0 to +50

With this setting you can adjust the brightness of green

color. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.

■Green Contrast*4*6

`–50 to 0 to +50

With this setting you can adjust the contrast of green color.

“–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.

■Blue Brightness*4*6

`–50 to 0 to +50

With this setting you can adjust the brightness of blue

color. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.

■Blue Contrast*4*6

`–50 to 0 to +50

With this setting you can adjust the contrast of blue color.

“–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.

Note

•“Picture Adjust” cannot be used when:

–The NET input selector is selected, or

–“Monitor Out” is set to “Sub” (➔pages 57).

*1 This procedure can also be performed on the remote controller

by using the Quick Setup (➔page 51).

*2 When a 3D video source is input, “Wide Mode” is fixed to

“Full”.

*3 When “Metadata Compatible” is enabled (➔page 62),

“Picture Mode” is fixed to “Direct”.

*4 When the “Picture Mode” setting is set to anything other than

“Custom”, this setting cannot be used.

*5 If the “Resolution” setting is set to “4K Upscaling”

(➔pages 57, 71), this setting is fixed at “Off”.

*6 Press CLR if you want to reset to the default value.

*7 When the “Noise Reduction” setting is set to anything other

than “Off”, this setting cannot be selected.

*8 With some TVs, there may be no picture when this setting is

set to “4K Upscaling”.

Advanced Operations

En-72

Audio Selector

■Audio Selector

`ARC:

The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to

HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver.*1

With this selection, the TV’s audio can be

automatically selected as a priority among other

assignments.

`HDMI:

This can be selected when HDMI IN has been

assigned as an input source. If both HDMI (HDMI

IN) and digital audio inputs (COAXIAL IN or

OPTICAL IN) have been assigned, HDMI input is

automatically selected as a priority.

`COAXIAL:

This can be selected when COAXIAL IN has been

assigned as an input source. If both coaxial and

HDMI inputs have been assigned, coaxial input is

automatically selected as a priority.

`OPTICAL:

This can be selected when OPTICAL IN has been

assigned as an input source. If both optical and HDMI

inputs have been assigned, optical input is

automatically selected as a priority.

`Analog:

The AV receiver always outputs analog signals.

You can set priorities of audio output when there are both

digital and analog inputs.

Note

• This setting can be made only for an input source that is assigned

to HDMI IN, COAXIAL IN, or OPTICAL IN.

• This setting cannot be used with the NET and USB input

selectors.

• When using the Whole House Mode, “Audio Selector” is fixed

to “Analog”.

• With the GAME2 input selector, “Analog” cannot be used.

*1 You can select “ARC” if you select the TV/CD input selector.

But you cannot if you’ve selected “Off” in the “Audio Return

Channel” setting (➔page 76).

Setting the Incoming Digital Signal (Fixed

Mode)

■Fixed Mode

`Off:

The format is detected automatically. If no digital

input signal is present, the corresponding analog

input is used instead.

`PCM:

Only 2-channel PCM format input signals will be

heard. If the input signal is not PCM, the PCM

indicator will flash and noise may also be produced.

`DTS:

Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) format input signals

will be heard. If the input signal is not DTS, the dts

indicator will flash and there will be no sound.

When “HDMI”, “COAXIAL” or “OPTICAL” is selected

in the “Audio Selector” setting, you can then specify the

signal type in “Fixed Mode”.

Normally, the AV receiver detects the signal format

automatically. However, if you experience either of the

following issues when playing PCM or DTS material, you

can manually set the signal format to PCM or DTS.

• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut off,

try setting the format to PCM.

• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or reversing a

DTS CD, try setting the format to DTS.

Note

• The setting will be reset to “Off” when you change the setting in

“Audio Selector”.

Main Menu Listening Mode Preset

You can assign a default listening mode to each input

source that will be selected automatically when you select

each input source. For example, you can set the default

listening mode to be used with Dolby Digital input signals.

You can select other listening modes during playback, but

the mode specified here will be resumed once the AV

receiver has been set to standby.

Listening Mode Preset

1Use q/w to select the input source that you want to

set, and then press ENTER.

The following menu appears.

1 2 3 4 5

“Setup”

Default listening mode for analog and PCM sources.

Analog/PCM

Mono/Multiplex Source

2ch Source

Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD

DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD

Other Multich Source

Last Valid e r

5-1. Listening Mode Preset BD/DVD

Last Valid

To be continued

Advanced Operations

En-73

■Analog/PCM/Digital

With this setting, you can specify the listening mode

used when an analog (CD, TV, LD, VHS, MD, turntable,

radio, cassette, cable, satellite, etc.) or PCM digital (CD,

DVD, etc.) audio signal is played.

Note

•For the “GAME2” input selector, only “PCM” is available.

■Mono/Multiplex Source

With this setting, you can specify the listening mode

used when a mono digital audio signal is played (DVD,

etc.).

■2ch Source

With this setting, you can specify the listening mode

used when 2-channel (2/0) stereo digital sources, such as

Dolby Digital or DTS, are played.

■Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD

With this setting, you can specify the listening mode

used when Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus format

digital audio signals are played (DVD, etc.). Specifies

the default listening mode for Dolby TrueHD sources,

such as Blu-ray or HD DVD (input via HDMI).

■DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD

With this setting, you can specify the listening mode

used when DTS or DTS-HD High Resolution format

digital audio signals are played (DVD, LD, CD, etc.).

Specifies the default listening mode for DTS-HD Master

Audio sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD (input via

HDMI).

■Other Multich Source

Specifies the default listening mode for multichannel

PCM sources from HDMI IN such as DVD-Audio, and

DSD multichannel sources such as Super Audio CD.

Main Menu Miscellaneous

Volume Setup

■Volume Display

`Absolute:

Displayed range is Min, 0.5 to 99.5, Max.

`Relative(THX):

Displayed range is –QdB, –81.5dB to +18.0dB.

With this setting, you can choose how the volume level is

displayed.

The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value

0dB.

Note

• If the absolute value is set to 82, “82.0Ref” will appear on the

display and the THX indicator will flash.

■Muting Level

`–QdB (fully muted), –50dB to –10dB in 10 dB steps.

This setting determines how much the output is muted when

the muting function is used (➔page 49).

■Maximum Volume

`Off, 50 to 99 (Absolute display)

`Off, –32dB to +17dB (Relative display)

With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.

To disable this setting, select “Off”.

2Use q/w to select the signal format that you want to

set, and then use e/r to select a listening mode.

Only listening modes that can be used with each input

signal format can be selected (➔pages 40 to 46).

The “Last Valid” option means that the listening

mode selected last will be used.

The “Straight Decode” option means that straight

decoding listening mode (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) is

selected.

Note

•For the “TUNER” input selector, only “Analog” will be

available.

•For the “NET” or “USB” input selector, only “Digital” will

be available.

Miscellaneous

1 2 3 4 5

“Setup”

Advanced Operations

En-74

■Power On Volume

`Last, Min, 1 to 99 or Max (Absolute display)

`Last, –QdB, –81dB to +18dB (Relative display)

With this preference, you can specify the volume setting to

be used each time the AV receiver is turned on.

To use the same volume level that was used when the AV

receiver was turned off, select “Last”.

The “Power On Volume” setting cannot be set higher than

the “Maximum Volume” setting.

■Headphone Level

`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB

With this setting, you can specify the headphone volume

relative to the main volume. This is useful if there’s a

volume difference between your speakers and your

headphones.

OSD Setup

■On Screen Display

`On

`Off

This preference determines whether operation details are

displayed on-screen when an AV receiver function is

adjusted.

Even when “On” is selected, operation details may not be

output if the input source is connected to an HDMI IN.

■Language

(North American models)

`English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,

Nederlands, Svenska

(European, Australian and Asian models)

`English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,

Nederlands, Svenska, 中文

This setting determines the language used for the on-screen

menus.

■Screen Saver

`3min, 5min, 10min

`Off

With this setting, you can set the time until the screen saver

activates itself. Once active, the screen saver will go off

and the screen will return to its previous state if the AV

receiver is operated in any way.

Main Menu Hardware Setup

Tuner

■AM/FM Frequency Step (North American

models)

`10kHz/200kHz:

`9kHz/50kHz:

Select the frequency step according to your area.

■AM Frequency Step (European, Australian and

Asian models)

`10kHz:

`9kHz:

Select the frequency step according to your area.

For AM/FM tuning to work properly, you must specify the

AM/FM frequency step used in your area.

Note

• When this setting is changed, all radio presets will be deleted.

Hardware Setup

1 2 3 4 5

“Setup”

Advanced Operations

En-75

HDMI

■HDMI Control(RIHD)

`Off

`On

Turn this setting on to allow p-compatible

components connected via HDMI to be controlled by the

AV receiver (➔page 104).

Note

• When the setting is set to “On” and the menu is closed, the names

of connected p-compatible components and “RIHD On”

are displayed on the AV receiver.

“Search…” → “(name)” → “RIHD On”

When the AV receiver cannot receive the name of the component,

it is displayed as “Player*” or “Recorder*”, etc. (“*” shows up

and indicates the number of components, when two or more are

received).

•When an p-compatible component is connected to the

AV receiver via an HDMI cable, the name of the connected

component is displayed on the AV receiver display. For example,

while you are watching TV broadcasting, if you operate a Blu-ray

Disc/DVD player (being powered on) with the remote control of

the AV receiver, the name of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player will

be displayed on the AV receiver.

• Set it to “Off” when a connected piece of equipment is not

compatible or it is unclear whether the equipment is compatible

or not.

• If operation is not normal when set to “On”, change the setting to

“Off”.

• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for

details.

•When the “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “On”, the

power consumption on standby mode slightly increases.

(Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter standby

mode as usual.)

•The p control does not support HDMI OUT SUB. Use

HDMI OUT MAIN instead.

• When the source equipment is connected with the u

connection, it may malfunction if “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is

set to “On”.

■HDMI Through

`Off

`BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,

PC, AUX, TV/CD, PHONO:

Selects the input source for which the HDMI

Through function is enabled.

`Last:

The HDMI Through function is activated on the input

source selected at the time of setting the AV receiver

to standby mode.

When enabling the HDMI Through function, regardless of

whether the AV receiver is on or in standby, both audio

and video streams from an HDMI input will be output to

the TV or other components via HDMI connection. The

HDMI indicator will be dimly-lit in standby mode. Note

that the indicator may not light under certain conditions

(➔page 56).

This setting is fixed to “Auto” automatically when the

above “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “On”,

resulting in automatic input source selection.

Note

• Only an input source assigned to an HDMI IN via “HDMI Input”

setting is enabled (➔page 58).

• The power consumption in standby mode will increase during the

HDMI Through function; however in the following cases, the

power consumption can be saved:

– The TV is in standby mode.

– You are watching a TV program.

• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for

details.

• Depending on the connected component, the correct input source

may not be selected with the setting fixed to “Auto”.

• This setting is set to “Off” automatically when the “HDMI

Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.

■Audio TV Out

`Off

`On

This preference determines whether the incoming audio

signal is output from the HDMI output. You may want to

turn this preference on if your TV is connected to the

HDMI output and you want to listen to the audio from a

connected component through your TV’s speakers.

Normally, this should be set to “Off”.

Note

• If “On” is selected and the audio can be output from the TV, the

AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers. In this

case, “TV Speaker” appears on the AV receiver’s display by

pressing DISPLAY.

• When “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On”, this setting is

fixed to “Auto”.

• When Digital Processing Crossover Network is being used, this

setting is not available.

• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output even

when this setting is set to “On”.

• When “Audio TV Out” or “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to

“On” and you’re listening through your TV’s speakers

(➔page 19), turning up the AV receiver’s volume control will

make the sound be output from the AV receiver’s front left and

right speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing

sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn

down the AV receiver’s volume.

• Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set to

“On” and the input source is not HDMI.

Advanced Operations

En-76

■Audio Return Channel (ARC)

`Off

`Auto:

The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to

HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver.

The audio return channel (ARC) function allows an ARC

capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI OUT MAIN

of the AV receiver. To use this function, you must select

the TV/CD input selector and your TV must be ARC

capable. Default setting: “----”

Note

• This setting is fixed to “----” when the “HDMI

Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.

• This setting is set to “Auto” automatically when the “HDMI

Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “On” for the first time.

• If you set “Audio Return Channel” to “Auto”, the “Audio

Selector” settings of the TV/CD input selector will be

automatically switched to “ARC” (➔page 72).

■Lip Sync

`Off

`On

This function allows the AV receiver to automatically

correct any delay between the video and the audio, based

on the data from the connected monitor.

Note

• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible TV supports

HDMI Lip Sync.

■InstaPrevue

These settings apply to “InstaPrevue” of the Home menu

(➔page 47) and specify the preview display of HDMI

video streams.

Sub Window

`Multi:

Displays preview thumbnails all at once.

`Single:

Displays preview thumbnails one-by-one.

With this setting, you can set the number of preview

thumbnails displayed.

Position

(with “Sub Window” set to “Multi”)

`Top, Bottom, Left, Right

(with “Sub Window” set to “Single”)

`Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Left, Lower Right

With this setting, you can set the position of preview

thumbnails on the TV screen.

Note

• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be properly

rendered on the preview thumbnails of InstaPrevue.

Auto Standby

■Auto Standby

`Off

`On

When “Auto Standby” is set to “On”, the AV receiver

will automatically enter standby mode if there is no

operation for 30 minutes with no audio and no video signal

input.

“Auto Standby” will appear on the AV receiver’s display

and OSD 30 seconds before the Auto Standby comes on.

Default setting: On (European, Australian and Asian

models), Off (North American models)

Note

•Set to “

On”, the Auto Standby function may activate itself during

playback with some sources.

•The Auto

Standby function does not work when Zone 2/3 is on.

Network

This section explains how to configure the AV receiver’s

network settings manually.

If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t need to

change any of these settings, as the AV receiver is set to

use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default (i.e.,

DHCP is set to “Enable”). If, however, your router’s

DHCP server is disabled (you’re for example using static

IP), you’ll need to configure these settings yourself, in

which case, a knowledge of Ethernet networking is

essential.

What’s DHCP?

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used by

routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other devices to

automatically configure themselves on a network.

What’s DNS?

The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain

names into IP addresses. For example, when you enter a

domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in your Web

browser, before accessing the site, your browser uses DNS

to translate this into an IP address, in this case

63.148.251.142.

■MAC Address

This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access Control)

address. This address cannot be changed.

After changing the settings of the “HDMI

Control(RIHD)”, “HDMI Through” or “Audio

Return Channel”, turn off the power on all connected

pieces of equipment and then turn them on again. Refer

to the user’s manuals for all connected pieces of

equipment.

After modifying the network settings, you must confirm

the changes by executing “Save”.

Advanced Operations

En-77

■DHCP

`Enable

`Disable

This setting determines whether or not the AV receiver

uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address,

Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings.

Note

• If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP Address”,

“Subnet Mask”, “Gateway”, and “DNS Server” settings

yourself.

■IP Address

`Class A:

“10.0.0.0” to “10.255.255.255”

`Class B:

“172.16.0.0” to “172.31.255.255”

`Class C:

“192.168.0.0” to “192.168.255.255”

Enter a static IP address provided by your Internet Service

Provider (ISP).

Most routers use Class C IP addresses.

■Subnet Mask

Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP

(typically 255.255.255.0).

■Gateway

Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.

■DNS Server

Enter the DNS server address provided by your ISP.

■Proxy URL

To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.

■Proxy Port

If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port number

here.

■Network Standby

`On

`Off

This setting enables or disables control over the network.

When enabled, the NET indicator will be dimly-lit while

the AV receiver is in standby mode. Note that the indicator

may not light under certain conditions (➔page 56).

Note

• When set to “On”, the power consumption slightly increases in

standby mode.

■Update Notice

`Enable

`Disable

When this setting is enabled, you will be notified if a

firmware update via network is available.

Note

• Selecting “Never Remind me” on the notification window will

switch this setting to “Disable” (➔page 23).

• For details on the update notification, see “If the “Firmware

Update Available” window appears.” (➔page 23).

Initial Setup

If you skipped the initial setup wizard, for example on

first-time use, you can reaccess it from here.

See “Initial Setup” (➔page 24).

Main Menu Remote Controller Setup

Remote ID

■Remote ID

`1, 2, or 3

When several Onkyo components are used in the same

room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differentiate

the AV receiver from other components, you can change

its remote ID from “1”, to “2” or “3”.

Note

• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure to change

the remote controller to the same ID (see below), otherwise, you

won’t be able to control it with the remote controller.

Changing the remote controller’s ID

Remote Mode Setup

See “Looking up for Remote Control Codes”

(➔page 84).

Main Menu Lock Setup

With this preference, you can protect your settings by

locking the setup menus.

■Setup

`Locked

`Unlocked

When “Locked” is selected, the setup menus will be

locked and you cannot change any setting.

Remote Controller Setup

1 2 3 4 5

“Setup”

1While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold

down Q SETUP until the RECEIVER lights (about

3 seconds).

2Use the number buttons to enter ID 1, 2, or 3.

RECEIVER flashes twice.

Lock Setup

1 2 3 4 5

“Setup”

Advanced Operations

En-78

Multi Zone

In addition to the main listening room, you can also enjoy

playback in the other room, or as we call Multi Zone. And,

you can select a different source for each room.

There are two ways you can connect Zone speakers:

1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.

2. Connect them to an additional amplifier.

Connecting Your Zone Speakers Directly to

the AV receiver

This setup allows you to select different sources for Main

room and Zone 2/3. This is called Powered Zone, as the

Zone 2/3 speakers are powered by the AV receiver.

Note

• With this setup, the volume of Zone 2/3 is controlled by the AV

receiver.

• When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main room is

reduced to 5.1 channels.

• When Powered Zone 3 is used, playback in the main room is

reduced to 3.1 channels.

12V Trigger Out

When Zone 2/3 is turned on, the output from the 12V

TRIGGER OUT jack goes high (+12 V and max. 150 mA

for Zone 2, +12 V and max. 25 mA for Zone 3).

Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger input on a

component in Zone 2/3 will make that component turn on

or off as the AV receiver turns on or off the Zone 2/3.

Making Multi Zone Connections

To use this setup, you must activate the Powered

Zone 2/3 setting (➔page 59).

R L

Main room

Zone 2

AV receiver

R L

Main room

Zone 3

AV receiver

Advanced Operations

En-79

Connecting the Zone Speakers to an

Additional Amplifier

This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main

listening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2/3.

Note

• The volume of Zone 2/3 must be set on the Zone 2/3 amplifier.

■Operating on the AV receiver

Tip

• The Whole House Mode function shares the input source of main

room with Multi Zone (➔page 49).

■Operating on the remote controller

To control Zone 2/3, you must press ZONE on the remote

controller first.

ZONE turns red when Zone 2 is on, and green when

Zone 3 is on.

Main room

Zone 2

AV receiver

Receiver/

integrated amp

Receiver/

integrated amp

Zone 3

Controlling Multi Zone Components

1To turn on Zone 2/3 and select an input source,

press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 followed by an input

selector button within 8 seconds.

Zone 2/3 turns on, the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on the

AV receiver’s display.

Tip

• The corresponding trigger output goes high (+12 V).

To select AM or FM, press TUNER input selector and

ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 repeatedly.

To select the same source as the main room’s, press

ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 twice. “Zone 2 Selector:

Source” or “Zone 3 Selector: Source” appears on the

AV receiver’s display.

ZONE 3

ZONE 2 OFF

MASTER VOLUME

Input selector buttons

2To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3.

The Z2/Z3 indicator on the AV receiver’s display

flashes. Press OFF.

The zone is turned off.

Tip

• The corresponding trigger output goes low (0 volts).

1Press ZONE repeatedly, then point the remote

controller at the AV receiver and press

8RECEIVER.

Zone 2/3 turns on, the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on the

AV receiver’s display.

Tip

• The corresponding trigger output goes high (+12 V).

8RECEIVER

MUTING

VOLq/w

ZONE

Input selector buttons

To be continued

Advanced Operations

En-80

Adjusting the Volume for Zones

■Operating on the remote controller

■Operating on the AV receiver

If your Zone 2/3 speakers are connected to a receiver or

integrated amplifier in Zone 2/3, use its volume control to

adjust the volume.

Muting Zones

■Operating on the remote controller

Tip

• To unmute, press ZONE followed by MUTING again. Zones can

also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.

Note

• Only analog input sources are output by the ZONE 2/3 LINE

OUT and FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R, FRONT

HIGH/ZONE 3 L/R terminals. Digital input sources are not

output. If no sound is heard when an input source is selected,

verify that the source is connected to an analog input.

• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations for your

main room and Zone 2/3. The same AM/FM radio station will be

heard in each room. Namely, if you have selected an FM station

for the main room, that station will also be output in Zone 2/3.

• When you have selected NET or USB as input selector, the last

selector selected will be set for Main room and Zone 2/3.

• When Zone 2/3 is activated and its input selector is selected, the

power consumption of standby mode slightly increases.

• While Zone 2/3 is on, u functions will not work.

• When setting the AV receiver to standby mode while Zone 2/3 is

active, the Z2 or Z3 indicator is dimly lit.

• Activating Zones in the main room when the listening mode is set

to Pure Audio will automatically switch it to Direct.

•“GAME2” cannot be selected as input sources for Zone 2/3.

• When “GAME2” is the input source of Main room and Zone 2/3

is set to share the same source, no sound will be output from

Zone 2/3.

• Even if you repeatedly press the remote controller’s ZONE to

select zones, the last zone selection will be retained once you

have switched to other components by pressing other REMOTE

MODE after pressing ZONE.

2To select an input source for Zone 2/3, press ZONE

repeatedly, followed by an INPUT SELECTOR

button.

To select AM or FM, press the TUNER input selector

and ZONE repeatedly.

3To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE repeatedly,

followed by 8RECEIVER.

The zone is turned off.

Tip

• The corresponding trigger output goes low (0 volts).

1Press ZONE repeatedly.

2Use VOL q/w.

1Press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 (the Z2/Z3 indicator on

the AV receiver’s display flashes).

2Use MASTER VOLUME control within 8 seconds.

1Press ZONE repeatedly, and then press MUTING.

Advanced Operations

En-81

To control the AV receiver with the remote controller

while you’re in Zone, you’ll need a commercially available

multiroom remote control kit for each zone.

• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.

These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line of

sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such as when it’s

installed inside a cabinet.

Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone

In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone picks up the infrared

signals from the remote controller and feeds them through

to the AV receiver in the main room via the connecting

block.

The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be

connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN jack, as shown

below.

Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet

In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals

from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV

receiver located in the cabinet via the connecting block.

Using a Multiroom Kit with Other

Components

In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV

receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other

component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals

received at the AV receiver’s IR IN jack are fed through to

the other component via the IR emitter. Signals picked up

by the AV receiver’s remote control sensor are not output.

The IR emitter should be connected to the AV receiver’s

IR OUT jack, as shown below.

Using the Remote Controller in

Zone and Multiroom Control Kits

IR IN

Connecting

block

Remote controller

receiver

Main room Zone

Signal flow

From the connecting block

Miniplug cable

AV receiver

Signal flow

IR IN

Connecting

block

Remote controller

receiver

Inside

cabinet

Signal flow

IR IN

IR OUT

Connecting

block

IR receiver

Remote controller

Signal flow

IR Emitter

Other component

AV receiver

Remote control sensor

Other component

Emitter

Signal flow

Miniplug

Miniplug cable

AV receiver

From the connecting block

IR Emitter

En-82

Controlling Other Components

iPod/iPhone Playback

via Onkyo Dock

RI Dock

With the RI Dock, you can easily play the music of your

iPod/iPhone, or watch the slideshows and videos of your

iPod/iPhone on a TV. In addition, the on-screen display

(OSD) allows you to view, navigate, and select your

iPod/iPhone model’s contents on your TV, and with the

supplied remote controller, you can control your

iPod/iPhone from the comfort of your sofa. You can even

use the AV receiver’s remote controller to operate your

iPod/iPhone.

Note

• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the AV

receiver’s remote controller for the first time (➔page 85).

• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an u cable

(➔page 21).

• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or

“HDD/DOCK”.

• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK” (➔page 48).

■System Function

System On

When you turn on the AV receiver, the RI Dock and

iPod/iPhone turn on automatically. In addition, when RI

Dock and iPod/iPhone are on, the AV receiver can be

turned on by pressing 8SOURCE.

Auto Power On

If you press the remote controller’s 1 (Playback) while

the AV receiver is on standby, the AV receiver will

automatically turn on, select your iPod/iPhone as the input

source, and your iPod/iPhone will start playback.

Direct Change

If you start iPod/iPhone playback while listening to another

input source, the AV receiver will automatically switch to

the input to which the RI Dock is connected.

Other Remote Operations

You can use the remote controller that came with the AV

receiver to control other iPod/iPhone functions. The

available functionality depends on the AV receiver.

Note

• If you use your iPod/iPhone with any other accessories,

iPod/iPhone playback detection may not work.

• The System On function may not work depending on the RI

Dock.

iPod Alarm

If you use the Alarm function on your iPod to start

playback, the AV receiver will turn on at the specified time

and select your iPod as the input source automatically.

Note

• This linked operation won’t work while a video is being played

or when the sound set for the alarm is a built-in sound (Beep).

• This linked operation won’t work with models on which music

files cannot be used to set the alarm sound.

Using the Onkyo Dock

The Dock is sold separately. Models sold are different

depending on the region.

For the latest information on the Onkyo Dock

components, see the Onkyo web site at:

http://www.onkyo.com

Before using the Onkyo Dock components, update

your iPod/iPhone with the latest software, available

from the Apple web site.

For supported iPod/iPhone models, see the instruction

manual of the Onkyo Dock.

Depending on your iPod/iPhone model and generation,

some of the linked operations may not be available.

■Operating Notes

• Use the AV receiver’s volume control to adjust the playback

volume.

• While your iPod/iPhone is inserted in the RI Dock, its volume

control has no effect.

• If you do adjust the volume control on your iPod/iPhone while

it’s inserted in the RI Dock, be careful that it’s not set too loud

before you reconnect your headphones.

Controlling Other Components

En-83

By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been

programmed with the remote control code for your Dock,

you can control your iPod/iPhone in the Dock with the

buttons described further in this section.

See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for details on

entering a remote control code (➔page 85).

See the Dock’s instruction manual for more information.

RI Dock

• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or

“HDD/DOCK”.

•8SOURCE may not work with a remote control code

(without u). In this case, make an u connection and

enter the remote control code 81993 (with u).

■With the RI Control

Make an u connection and enter the remote control code

81993 (with u).

• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK”

(➔page 48).

■Without the RI Control

You must enter the remote control code 82990 first

(➔page 86).

■u Dock operation

• With some iPod/iPhone models, generations and RI Docks,

certain buttons may not work as expected.

• For detailed operation of iPod/iPhone, please refer to the

instruction manual of the RI Dock.

*1 TOP MENU works as the mode button when used with the

DS-A2 RI Dock.

*2 DISPLAY turns on the backlight for a few seconds.

*3 This button does not turn the Onkyo DS-A2 or DS-A2X RI

Dock on or off. Also, your iPod/iPhone may not respond the

first time you press this button, in which case you should press

it again. This is because the remote controller transmits the On

and Standby commands alternately, so if your iPod/iPhone is

already on, it will remain on when the remote controller

transmits the On command. Similarly, if your iPod/iPhone is

already off, it will remain off when the remote controller

transmits the Off command.

*4 Resume mode

With the Resume function, you can resume playback of the

song that was playing when you removed your iPod/iPhone

from the Onkyo DS-A2 RI Dock.

Controlling Your iPod/iPhone

Press the appropriate REMOTE

MODE button first. Available buttons

aTOP MENU*1 eDISPLAY*2

bq/w/e/r, ENTER f8SOURCE*3

PLAYLIST e/rgMUTING

c1, 3, 2, 5, 4,

7, 6

hALBUM +/–

iVOL q/w

dREPEAT jMENU

RANDOM kMODE*4

Controlling Other Components

En-84

Controlling Other

Components

You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control

your other AV components. This section explains how to

enter the remote control code for a component that you

want to control: DVD, TV, CD, etc.

See “Learning Commands” for learning commands

directly from another component’s remote controller

(➔page 89).

See “Using Normal Macros” for programming

ACTIVITIES to perform a sequence of remote control

actions (➔page 90).

The following REMOTE MODE buttons are

preprogrammed with remote control codes for controlling

the components listed. You do not need to enter a remote

control code to control these components.

For details on controlling these components, see the

indicated pages.

You can look up for an appropriate remote control code

from the on-screen menu.

Preprogrammed Remote Control

Codes

BD/DVD Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player (➔page 87)

TV/CD Onkyo CD player (➔page 86)

STB/DVR Apple TV

Looking up for Remote Control Codes

You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output

(HDMI OUT MAIN) to make the following on-screen

setting.

1Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.

2Use e/r to select “Setup”, and then press ENTER.

3Use q/w to select “Remote Controller Setup”, and

then press ENTER.

4Use q/w to select “Remote Mode Setup”, and then

press ENTER.

5Use q/w to select a remote mode, and then press

ENTER.

The menu of category selection appears.

6Use q/w to select a category, and then press

ENTER.

The keyboard screen for brand name input appears.

7Use q/w/e/r to select a character, and then press

ENTER.

Repeat this step for the first three characters of the

brand name.

When you have entered the 3rd character, select

“Search” and press ENTER.

A list of brand names is retrieved.

If the desired brand name is not found:

Use r to select “Not Listed”, and then press

ENTER.

The keyboard screen for brand name input appears.

8Use q/w to select a brand, and then press ENTER.

A remote control code with its instructions are

displayed. Follow the procedure.

9If you can control the component, use q/w to select

“OK”, and then press ENTER.

The on-screen menu returns to the “Remote Mode

Setup” front screen.

If you cannot control the component, use q/w to

select “Try Next Code” and press ENTER.

The next code is displayed.

Controlling Other Components

En-85

You’ll need to enter a code for each component that you

want to control.

Note

• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time

of release, they are subject to change.

You can change the configuration of colored buttons, with

which REMOTE MODE buttons are preset.

Tip

• To reset the REMOTE MODE buttons to their default settings,

see “Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons” (➔page 86).

Note

• If any other button than the colored buttons is pressed, the

operation will be cancelled.

• This operation cannot be done while the AV receiver is in

Receiver mode or when ZONE 2/3 is active.

Entering Remote Control Codes

1Look up the appropriate remote control code in the

separate Remote Control Codes list.

The codes are organized by category (e.g., DVD

player, TV, etc.).

2While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to

which you want to assign a code, press and hold

down DISPLAY (about 3 seconds).

The REMOTE MODE button lights.

Note

• Remote control codes cannot be entered for RECEIVER

and the multi zone button.

• Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV.

• Except for RECEIVER, TV, and the multi zone button,

remote control codes from any category can be assigned for

the REMOTE MODE buttons. However, these buttons also

work as input selector buttons (➔page 26), so choose a

REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input to

which you connect your component. For example, if you

connect your CD player to the CD input, choose TV/CD

when entering its remote control code.

3Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter

the 5-digit remote control code.

The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.

If the remote control code is not entered successfully,

the REMOTE MODE button will flash once slowly.

Remapping Colored Buttons

1While holding down the REMOTE MODE button

that you want to program, press and hold down A

(Red) until the REMOTE MODE button lights

(about 3 seconds).

You can only change colored buttons for components

whose codes belong to categories of the Remote

Control Codes list (BD/DVD player, TV, cable set-top

box, etc).

2Within 30 seconds, press the colored buttons in the

order that you want to reassign them.

The button presses are assigned to each button from

left to right. The REMOTE MODE button flashes

twice, indicating that the sequence has been

successfully assigned. If the sequence is not

successfully assigned, the REMOTE MODE button

will flash once slowly.

Controlling Other Components

En-86

Onkyo components that are connected via u are

controlled by pointing the remote controller at the AV

receiver, not the component. This allows you to control

components that are out of view, in a rack, for example.

Controlling Onkyo components without u

If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing the

remote controller directly at it, or you want to control an

Onkyo component that’s not connected via u, use the

following remote control codes:

`30627:

Onkyo DVD player without u

`71817:

Onkyo CD player without u

`32900/33100/33500:

Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player

`32901/33104/33504:

Onkyo HD DVD player

`70868:

Onkyo MD recorder without u

`71323:

Onkyo CD recorder without u

`82990:

Onkyo Dock without u

You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default

remote control code.

You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.

By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been

programmed with the remote control code for your

component, you can control your component as described

below.

For details on entering a remote control code for other

components, see “Entering Remote Control Codes”

(➔page 85).

Controlling a TV

TV is preprogrammed with the remote control code for

controlling a TV that supports the p*1 (limited to

some models). The TV must be able to receive remote

control commands via p and be connected to the

AV receiver via HDMI. If controlling your TV via

p doesn’t work very well, program your TV’s

remote control code into TV and use the TV remote mode

to control your TV.

Use the following remote control codes:

`11807/13100/13500:

TV with p

Controlling Apple TV

By programming the supplied remote controller with the

appropriate remote control code, you can use it to operate

your Apple TV.

Use the following remote control codes:

`02615:

Apple TV

Remote Control Codes for Onkyo

Components Connected via RI

1Make sure the Onkyo component is connected with

an u cable and an analog audio cable (RCA).

See “Connecting Onkyo RI Components” for details

(➔page 21).

2Enter the appropriate remote control code for a

REMOTE MODE button, by referring to the

previous section.

`42157:

Onkyo cassette tape deck with u

`81993:

Onkyo Dock with u

3Press the REMOTE MODE button, point the

remote controller at the AV receiver, and operate

the component.

Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons

1While holding down the REMOTE MODE button

that you want to reset, press and hold down HOME

until the REMOTE MODE button lights (about 3

seconds).

2Within 30 seconds, press the REMOTE MODE

button again.

The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice,

indicating that the button has been reset.

Each REMOTE MODE button is preprogrammed

with a remote control code. When a button is reset, its

preprogrammed code is restored.

Note

• The learning command is also reset.

Resetting the Remote Controller

1While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold

down HOME until RECEIVER lights (about 3

seconds).

2Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.

RECEIVER flashes twice, indicating that the remote

controller has been reset.

Controlling Other Components

En-87

Controlling MHL-Enabled Mobile Device

By programming the supplied remote controller with the

appropriate remote control code, you can use it to operate

your MHL-enabled mobile device.

Connect your MHL-enabled mobile device to the AUX

INPUT MHL jack. We advise you to program the remote

control code on the AUX button.

Use the following remote control codes:

(North American models)

`33101:

MHL-enabled mobile device

(European, Australian, and Asian models)

`32910:

MHL-enabled mobile device

Note

• With some mobile devices, reliable operation cannot be

guaranteed.

Controlling a Blu-ray Disc/DVD Player, HD

DVD Player or DVD Recorder

BD/DVD is preprogrammed with the remote control code

for controlling a component that supports the p*1

(limited to some models). The component must be able to

receive remote control commands via p and be

connected to the AV receiver via HDMI.

Use the following remote control codes:

`32910/33101/33501/31612:

Blu-ray Disc/DVD player with p

*1 The p supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system

control function of the HDMI standard.

■TV operation

■Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player operation

Press the appropriate REMOTE

MODE button first.

Press the appropriate REMOTE

MODE button first. Available buttons

a8, INPUT, TV VOL q/wgNumber: 1 to 9, 0

bGUIDE Number: +10*1

cq/w/e/r

ENTER

hDISPLAY

jMUTING

dSETUP kCH +/–

e1, 3, 2, 5, 4,

7, 6*1

lPREV CH

mRETURN

fA (Red)*1 nCLR

B (Green)*1

C (Yellow)*1

D (Blue)*1

Available buttons

bTOP MENU gNumber: 1 to 9, 0

cq/w/e/r

ENTER

Number: +10*1

hDISPLAY

dSETUP i8SOURCE

e1, 3, 2, 5, 4,

7, 6

jMUTING

kCH +/–

fA (Red) DISC +/–

B (Green) lMENU

C (Yellow) mRETURN

D (Blue) nCLR

Controlling Other Components

En-88

■DVD player/DVD recorder operation

■VCR/PVR operation

■Cassette tape deck operation

■Satellite receiver/Cable receiver operation

■CD player/CD recorder/MD recorder operation

Note

• With some components, certain buttons may not work as

expected, and some may not work at all.

• See “Controlling Your iPod/iPhone” about the operation of

iPod/iPhone (➔page 83).

*1 The p function is not supported. The p

supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control

function of the HDMI standard.

Press the appropriate REMOTE

MODE button first. Available buttons

bTOP MENU gNumber: 1 to 9, 0

cq/w/e/r

ENTER

Number: +10*1

hDISPLAY

dSETUP i8SOURCE

e1, 3, 2, 5, 4,

7, 6

jMUTING

kCH +/–

fA (Red)*1 DISC +/–

B (Green) lMENU

C (Yellow)*1 mRETURN

D (Blue)*1 nCLR

Available buttons

bGUIDE hDISPLAY

cq/w/e/r

ENTER

i8SOURCE

jMUTING

dSETUP kCH +/–

e1, 3, 2, 5, 4,

7, 6

lPREV CH

mRETURN

gNumber: 1 to 9, 0nCLR

Number: +10

Available buttons

e1, t (Reverse

Playback), 2, 5, 4,

7, 6

i8SOURCE

jMUTING

Available buttons

bGUIDE gNumber: 1 to 9, 0

cq/w/e/r

ENTER

Number: +10

hDISPLAY

dSETUP i8SOURCE

e1, 3, 2, 5, 4,

7, 6

jMUTING

kCH +/–

fA (Red) lPREV CH

B (Green) mRETURN

C (Yellow) nCLR

D (Blue)

Available buttons

cq/w/e/r

ENTER

gNumber: 1 to 9, 0

Number: +10

dSETUP hDISPLAY

e1, 3, 2, 5, 4,

7, 6

i8SOURCE

jMUTING

fSEARCH kDISC +/–

REPEAT nCLR

RANDOM

MODE

Controlling Other Components

En-89

The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the

commands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for

example, the Play command from your CD player’s remote

controller, the supplied remote controller can learn it and

then reproduce the exact same command when its 1 is

pressed in CD remote mode.

This is useful when some buttons don’t work as expected

though you entered the appropriate remote control code

(➔page 85).

Note

• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:

8RECEIVER, ALL OFF, MY MOVIE, MY TV, MY MUSIC,

REMOTE MODE, MODE.

• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to 90

commands, although this will be less if commands that use a lot

of memory are learned.

• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, and Pause are

preprogrammed with commands for controlling Onkyo CD

players, cassette decks, and DVD players. However, they can

learn new commands, and you can restore the preprogrammed

commands at any time by resetting the remote controller

(➔page 86).

• To overwrite a previously acquired command, repeat this

procedure.

• Depending on the remote controller used, some buttons may not

respond as expected, or the learning process itself may not be

possible.

• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can be

acquired.

• When the remote controller runs out of batteries, all commands

acquired will be lost and will have to be learned all over again.

Therefore, do not discard your other remote controllers.

■Deleting Acquired Commands

1. While holding down the REMOTE MODE button for

the mode from which you want to delete a command,

press and hold down 8TV until the REMOTE MODE

button lights (about 3 seconds).

2. Press the REMOTE MODE button or the button from

which you want to delete the command.

The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.

When you press the REMOTE MODE button, all

commands learned in that mode will be deleted.

Learning Commands

1While holding down the REMOTE MODE button

for the mode in which you want to use the

command, press and hold down 8RECEIVER

until the REMOTE MODE button lights (about 3

seconds).

2On the supplied remote controller, press the

button to which you want to assign the new

command.

3Point the remote controllers at each other, within

about 4 inches (10 cm) apart, and then press and

hold the button whose command you want to

acquire until the REMOTE MODE button flashes.

8RECEIVER

REMOTE

MODE

If the command is learned successfully, the

REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.

4To learn more commands, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Press any REMOTE MODE button when you’ve

finished. The REMOTE MODE button flashes

twice.

VOLUME

ING

POWER SLEEP DIMM

ER SUR

MODE

VIDEO-1 VIDEO-2

TAP E

DVD C D

C D DVD

NER

TUNER

PHONO

INPUT SELECTOR

DISC

CH SEL

PRESET

TEST

TONE

MULTI-CH

INPUT

GROUP

Within about

4 inches (10 cm)

Supplied remote

controller

Controlling Other Components

En-90

You can program the remote controller’s ACTIVITIES to

perform a sequence of remote control actions.

Example:

To play a CD you typically need to perform the following

actions:

1. Press RECEIVER to select the Receiver remote

controller mode.

2. Press 8RECEIVER to turn on the AV receiver.

3. Press TV/CD to select the TV/CD input source.

4. Press 1 to start playback on the CD player.

You can program ACTIVITIES so that all four actions are

performed with just one button press.

Making Macros

Each ACTIVITIES can store one macro, and each macro

can contain up to 32 commands.

Note

•MODE cannot be operated during the macro-making process.

• Once you assign new macro commands, the previously registered

macro will no longer work. If you wish to retrieve it, you will

have to reassign the commands with the macro-making.

Running Macros

Deleting Macros

Note

• When Normal macros are deleted, ACTIVITIES are restored to

their default settings, namely the Easy macro commands

(➔page 50).

• When using Normal macros, Easy macros cannot be used, which

includes changing the source components.

Using Normal Macros

1While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold

down MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC until

MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC lights (about

3 seconds).

2Press the buttons whose actions you want to

program into the macro in the order you want

them performed.

For the CD example above, you would press the

following buttons: 8RECEIVER, TV/CD, 1.

RECEIVER

MY MOVIE,

MY TV,

MY MUSIC

ALL OFF

3When you’ve finished, press ACTIVITIES again.

ACTIVITIES button flashes twice.

If you enter 32 commands, the process will finish

automatically.

1Press MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC.

The commands in the macro are transmitted in the

order in which they were programmed. Keep the

remote controller pointed at the AV receiver until all

of the commands have been transmitted.

Macros can be run at any time, regardless of the

current remote controller mode.

1While holding down HOME, press and hold down

ALL OFF until ALL OFF lights (about 3 seconds).

2Press ALL OFF again.

ALL OFF flashes twice.

En-91

Appendix

Troubleshooting

If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a

solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue

yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer.

■Can’t turn on the AV receiver

■The AV receiver turns off unexpectedly

■The AV receiver turns off and after restoring the

power, it turns off again

■There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet

If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting the

AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer.

To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it

on and, while holding down CBL/SAT, press

8ON/STANDBY. “Clear” will appear on the AV

receiver’s display and the AV receiver will enter

standby mode.

Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your radio

presets and custom settings.

To reset the remote controller to its factory defaults,

while holding down RECEIVER, press and hold down

HOME until RECEIVER lights (about 3 seconds).

Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.

HOME

RECEIVER

The on-screen information appears only on a TV that

is connected to HDMI outputs. If your TV is

connected to other video outputs, use the AV

receiver’s display when changing settings.

Power

Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged

into the wall outlet.

—

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five

seconds or more, then plug it in again.

—

The AV receiver will automatically enter standby

mode when Auto Standby has been set and launches.

The protection circuit has been activated. Remove the

power cord from the wall outlet immediately. Make

sure that all speaker cables and input sources are

properly connected, and leave the AV receiver with

its power cord disconnected for 1 hour. After that,

reconnect the power cord and turn the power on. If

the AV receiver turns off again, unplug the power

cord and contact your Onkyo dealer.

Caution: If “CHECK SP WIRE” appears on the AV

receiver’s display, the speaker cables may be

shorting.

WARNING

If smoke, smell or abnormal noise is produced by the AV

receiver, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet

immediately and contact your Onkyo dealer.

Audio

Make sure that the digital input source is selected

properly.

Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed

in all the way.

Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all

components are connected properly.

19-21

Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is

correct, and that the bare wires are in contact with the

metal part of each speaker terminal.

Make sure that the input source is properly selected. 26

Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting. 15

Check the volume. The AV receiver is designed for

home theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range,

allowing precise adjustment.

—

If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the AV

receiver’s display, press the remote controller’s

MUTING button to unmute the AV receiver.

While a pair of headphones is connected to the

PHONES jack, no sound is output from the speakers.

If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to

an HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output

settings, and be sure to select a supported audio

format.

—

Check the digital audio output setting on the

connected device. On some game consoles, such as

those that support DVD, the default setting is off.

—

With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an

audio output format from a menu.

—

If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must

connect an MC head amp, or an MC transformer.

—

Make sure that none of the connecting cables are

bent, twisted, or damaged.

—

Not all listening modes use all speakers. 40

Specify the speaker distances and adjust the

individual speaker levels.

Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not

still connected.

—

Appendix

En-92

■Only the front speakers produce sound

■Only the center speaker produces sound

■The surround speakers produce no sound

■The center speaker produces no sound

■The front high, front wide and surround back

speakers produce no sound

■The subwoofer produces no sound

■There’s no sound with a certain signal format

■Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode

■Can’t get 6.1/7.1 playback

■The speaker volume cannot be set as required

■Noise can be heard

■The Late Night function doesn’t work

If the input signal format is set to “PCM” or “DTS”.

Set it to “Off”.

When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected,

only the front speakers and subwoofer produce

sound.

In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers

output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set

to “Left / Right”.

Check the Speaker Configuration. 60

If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro

Logic IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

listening mode with a mono source, such as an AM

radio station or mono TV program, the sound is

concentrated in the center speaker.

—

In the Mono listening mode, only the center speaker

output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set

to “Center”.

Make sure the speakers are configured correctly. 60

When the T-D (Theater-Dimensional), Stereo or

Mono listening mode is selected, the surround

speakers produce no sound.

—

Depending on the source and current listening mode,

not much sound may be produced by the surround

speakers. Try selecting another listening mode.

Make sure the speakers are configured correctly. 60

When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected,

the center speaker produces no sound.

—

In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers

output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set

to “Left / Right”.

Make sure the speakers are configured correctly. 60

Depending on the current listening mode, no sound

may be produced by the front high, front wide and

surround back speakers. Select another listening

mode.

Depending on the sources, the sound produced by the

front high, front wide and surround back speakers

may be weak.

—

Make sure the speakers are configured correctly. 60

When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main

room is reduced to 5.1channels and the front high,

front wide and surround back speakers produce no

sound.

—

When Powered Zone 3 is used, playback in the main

room is reduced to 3.1channels and the front high,

front wide and surround back speakers produce no

sound.

—

When you play source material that contains no

information in the LFE channel, the subwoofer

produces no sound.

—

Make sure the speakers are configured correctly. 60

Check the digital audio output setting on the

connected device. On some game consoles, such as

those that support DVD, the default setting is off.

—

With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an

audio output format from a menu.

—

Depending on the input signal, some listening modes

cannot be selected.

40-46

The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected

while Zone 2/3 is on.

—

If no surround back speakers, front wide and front

high speakers are connected, or the Zone 2/3 speakers

are being used, 6.1/7.1 playback is not possible.

—

Depending on the number of connected speakers, it is

not always possible to select all of the listening

modes.

40-46

Check to see if a maximum volume has been set. 73

If the volume level of each individual speaker has

been adjusted to high positive values, then the

maximum master volume possible may be reduced.

Note that the individual speaker volume levels are set

automatically after the Audyssey MultEQ®XT32

Room Correction and Speaker Setup has been

performed.

37, 61

Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power

cords, speaker cables, and the like may degrade the

audio performance, so refrain from doing it.

—

An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try

repositioning your cables.

—

Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital,

Dolby Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD.

Make sure that the “TrueHD Loudness

Management” setting is not set to “Off”. The Late

Night function doesn’t work when this setting is

disabled.

Appendix

En-93

■About DTS signals

■The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN

can’t be heard

■There’s no sound during Whole House Mode

■There’s no picture

■There’s no picture from a source connected to

an HDMI IN

■The on-screen menus don’t appear

■The on-screen information does not appear

■Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is noisy,

or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t light

■The remote controller doesn’t work

When DTS program material ends and the DTS

bitstream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS

listening mode and the dts indicator remains on. This

is to prevent noise when you use the pause, fast

forward, or fast reverse function on your player. If

you switch your player from DTS to PCM, you may

not hear any sound because the AV receiver does not

switch formats immediately. In such case, you should

stop your player for about three seconds and then

resume playback.

—

With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to

playback DTS material properly even though your

player is connected to a digital input on the AV

receiver. This is usually because the DTS bitstream

has been processed (e.g., output level, sampling rate,

or frequency response changed) and the AV receiver

doesn’t recognize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such

cases, you may hear noise.

—

Playing DTS program material, using the pause, fast

forward, or fast reverse function on your player may

produce a short audible noise. This is not a

malfunction.

—

Since it takes longer to identify the format of an

HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio

signals, audio output may not start immediately.

—

Make sure you’ve selected an analog audio input. 59

Video

Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed

in all the way.

Make sure that each video component is properly

connected.

19, 20

If your TV is connected to the HDMI output, select

“-----” in the “HDMI Input” setting to watch

composite video, and component video sources.

If the video source is connected to a component video

input, you must assign that input to an input selector,

and your TV must be connected to either the HDMI

output or COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT.

20, 58

If the video source is connected to a composite video

input, your TV must be connected to the HDMI

output or the corresponding composite video output.

If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,

you must assign that input to an input selector, and

your TV must be connected to the HDMI output.

19, 58

While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the

video circuitry is turned off and only video signals

input through HDMI IN can be output.

On your TV, make sure that the video input to which

the AV receiver is connected is selected.

—

Reliable operation with an HDMI-to-DVI adapter is

not guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC

are not guaranteed.

106

When the resolution is set to any resolution not

supported by the TV, no video is output from the

HDMI output.

If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the

AV receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV

does not support the current video resolution and you

need to select another resolution on your DVD

player.

—

On your TV, make sure that the video input to which

the AV receiver is connected is selected.

—

When the AV receiver is not connected to a TV via

HDMI OUT MAIN, on-screen menus are not

displayed.

—

Depending on the input signal, the on-screen

information may not appear when the input signal

from HDMI IN is output to a device connected to the

HDMI output.

Tuner

Relocate your antenna. —

Move the AV receiver away from your TV or

computer.

—

Listen to the station in mono. 34

When listening to an AM station, operating the

remote controller may cause noise.

—

Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference. —

Concrete walls weaken radio signals. —

If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor

antenna.

—

Remote Controller

Before operating this unit, be sure to press

RECEIVER.

—

Make sure that the batteries are installed with the

correct polarity.

Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of

batteries, or old and new batteries.

Make sure that the remote controller is not too far

away from the AV receiver, and that there’s no

obstruction between the remote controller and the AV

receiver’s remote control sensor.

Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to

direct sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights.

Relocate if necessary.

—

If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet

with colored-glass doors, the remote controller may

not work reliably when the doors are closed.

—

Appendix

En-94

■Can’t control other components

■Can’t learn commands from another remote

controller

■There’s no sound

■There’s no video

■The AV receiver’s remote controller doesn’t

control my iPod/iPhone

■The AV receiver unexpectedly selects my

iPod/iPhone as the input source

■iPod/iPhone doesn’t work properly

■There’s no sound

■The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound

■Can’t access the server or Internet radio

■Playback stops while listening to music files on

the server

Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote

controller mode.

12, 86

When using the remote controller to control other

manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may

not work as expected.

—

Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control

code.

Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver

and remote controller.

If it’s an Onkyo component, make sure that the u

cable and analog audio cable are connected properly.

Connecting only an u cable won’t be enough.

Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote

controller mode.

12, 86

If you’ve connected an cassette tape deck to the

TV/CD IN jack, or an RI Dock to the TV/CD IN or

GAME 1 IN jacks, for the remote controller to work

properly, you must set the input display

appropriately.

If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the

appropriate remote control code.

To control another manufacturer’s component, point

the remote controller at that component.

To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via

u, point the remote controller at the AV receiver.

Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control code

first.

To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected

via u, point the remote controller at the component.

Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control code

first.

The entered remote control code may not be correct.

If more than one code is listed, try each one.

—

When learning commands, make sure that the

transmitting ends of both remote controllers are

pointing at each other.

Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that

cannot be used for learning? Some commands

cannot be learned, especially those that contain

several instructions.

—

RI Dock for iPod/iPhone

Make sure your iPod/iPhone is actually playing. —

Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in

the Dock.

—

Make sure the AV receiver is turned on, the correct

input source is selected, and the volume is turned up.

—

Make sure the plugs are pushed in all the way. —

Try resetting your iPod/iPhone. —

Make sure that your iPod/iPhone model’s TV OUT

setting is set to On.

—

Make sure the correct input is selected on your TV or

the AV receiver.

—

Some versions of the iPod/iPhone do not output

video.

—

Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in

the Dock. If your iPod/iPhone is in a case, it may not

connect properly to the Dock. Always remove your

iPod/iPhone from the case before inserting it into the

Dock.

—

The iPod/iPhone cannot be operated while it’s

displaying the Apple logo.

—

Make sure you’ve selected the right remote mode. 83

When you use the AV receiver’s remote controller,

point it toward your AV receiver.

—

If you still can’t control your iPod/iPhone, start

playback by pressing your iPod/iPhone model’s Play

button. Remote operation should then be possible.

—

Try resetting your iPod/iPhone. —

Depending on your iPod/iPhone, some buttons may

not work as expected.

—

Always pause iPod/iPhone playback before selecting

a different input source. If playback is not paused, the

Direct Change function may select your iPod/iPhone

as the input source by mistake during the transition

between tracks.

—

Try reconnecting your iPod/iPhone. —

Zone 2/3

Only components connected to analog inputs can be

played in Zone 2/3.

—

If the “Speakers Type (Front)” setting is set to other

than “Normal”, Powered Zone 2/3 cannot be used.

Music Server and Internet Radio

Check the network connection between the AV

receiver and your router or switch.

107

Make sure that your modem and router are properly

connected, and make sure they are both turned on.

—

Make sure the server is up and running and

compatible with the AV receiver.

108

Check the “Network”settings. 76

Make sure your server is compatible with the AV

receiver.

108

Appendix

En-95

■Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web

browser

■Can’t access the music files on a USB device

■Standby power consumption

■The sound changes when I connect my

headphones

■The speaker distance cannot be set as required

■The display doesn’t work

■How do I change the language of a multiplex

source

■The u functions don’t work

■The functions System On/Auto Power On and

Direct Change don’t work for components

connected via u

■When performing Automatic Speaker Setup, the

measurement fails and the message “Ambient

noise is too high.” is displayed.

■The following settings can be made for the

composite video inputs

You must use the buttons on the unit to make these

settings.

On the AV receiver, press the input selector for the input

source that you want to set and the SETUP button

simultaneously. While holding down the input selector

button, press SETUP until “Video ATT :On” appears

on the AV receiver’s display. Then, release both buttons.

To turn the setting off, repeat the above process so that

“Video ATT :Off” appears on the AV receiver’s

display, and release the buttons.

• Video Attenuation

This setting can be made for the BD/DVD, CBL/SAT,

STB/DVR, GAME 1, AUX, or USB input.

If you have a game console connected to the composite

video input, and the picture isn’t very clear, you can

attenuate the gain.

Video ATT :Off: The gain is not changed (default).

Video ATT :On: The gain is reduced by the values

specified below.

– 2 dB for the HDMI output.

– 6 dB for the MONITOR OUT V output.

If you download or copy large files on your

computer, playback may be interrupted. Try closing

any unused programs, use a more powerful computer,

or use a dedicated server.

—

If the server is serving large music files to several

networked devices simultaneously, the network may

become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.

Reduce the number of playback devices on the

network, upgrade your network, or use a switch

instead of a hub.

—

If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always

allocate the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if

you find that you can’t connect to a server or Internet

radio station, recheck the AV receiver’s IP address on

the “Network” screen.

Check the “Network” settings. 76

USB Device Playback

Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly. —

The AV receiver supports USB devices that support

the USB mass storage device class. However,

playback may not be possible with some USB devices

even if they conform to the USB mass storage device

class.

108

USB memory devices with security functions cannot

be played.

—

Others

In the following cases, the power consumption in

standby mode may reach up to a maximum of

12.0 W:

–The “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting is set to

“On”. (Depending on the TV status, the AV

receiver will enter standby mode as usual.)

–The “HDMI Through” setting is set to other than

“Off”.

–The “Network Standby” setting is set to “On”.

75, 77

If an MHL-enabled mobile device is connected to the

AUX (front) input, the power consumption in standby

mode will increase.

When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening

mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,

Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio.

—

The values entered may be automatically adjusted

with values best-suited for your home theater.

—

The display is turned off when the Pure Audio

listening mode is selected.

—

Use the “Multiplex” setting in the “Audio Adjust”

menu to select “Main” or “Sub”.

To use u, you must make an u connection and an

analog audio connection (RCA) between the

component and AV receiver, even if they are

connected digitally.

While Zone 2/3 is selected, the u functions don’t

work.

These functions don’t work when Zone 2/3 is turned

on.

This can be caused by a malfunction in your speaker

unit. Check if the unit produces normal sounds.

—

Appendix

En-96

■If the picture on your TV/monitor connected to

the HDMI output is unstable, try switching the

DeepColor function off

To turn off the DeepColor function, simultaneously

press the STB/DVR and 8ON/STANDBY buttons on

the AV receiver. While holding down STB/DVR, press

8ON/STANDBY until “Deep Color:Off” appears on

the AV receiver’s display. Then, release both buttons.

To reactivate the DeepColor function, repeat the above

process until “Deep Color:On” appears on the AV

receiver’s display and release the buttons.

The AV receiver can upconvert component video and

composite video sources for display on a TV connected to

the HDMI output. However, if the picture quality of the

source is poor, upconversion may make the picture worse

or disappear altogether.

In this case, try the following:

Tip

• To by-pass the upconversion, set the “Picture Mode” setting to

“Direct” (➔page 70).

The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal

processing and control functions. In very rare situations,

severe interference, noise from an external source, or

static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely

event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the

wall outlet, wait at least five seconds, and then plug it

back in.

Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD rental

fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by the unit’s

malfunction. Before you record important data, make

sure that the material will be recorded correctly.

Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall

outlet, set the AV receiver to standby.

Important Note Regarding Video Playback

1If the video source is connected to a component

video input, connect your TV to COMPONENT

VIDEO MONITOR OUT.

If the video source is connected to a composite video

input, connect your TV to MONITOR OUT V.

2On the main menu, select “Input/Output Assign”,

and then “Component Video Input” (➔page 58).

If the video source is connected to COMPONENT

VIDEO IN 1, select the relevant input selector, and

assign it to “IN1”.

If the video source is connected to COMPONENT

VIDEO IN 2, select the relevant input selector, and

assign it to “IN2”.

If the video source is connected to a composite video

input, select the relevant input selector, and assign it to

“-----”.

Appendix

En-97

Firmware Update

To update the firmware of the AV receiver, you can choose

from the following two methods: update via network, or

update via USB storage. Choose the one that best suits

your environment. Before proceeding with the update,

please read the corresponding explanations carefully.

■Update via network

You need a wired Internet connection to update the

firmware.

■Update via USB storage (➔page 99)

Please prepare a USB storage device such as a USB flash

memory stick. You need at least 32 MB of available

space to update the firmware.

Note

• Check the network connection before updating.

• Do not touch any cable or device connected to the AV receiver

during the update process.

• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it

is being updated.

• Do not shutdown the power of the AV receiver while it is being

updated.

• The storage media in the USB card reader may not work.

• If the USB device is partitioned, each section will be treated as an

independent device.

• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver may take

a while to read it.

• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which includes

the ability to power them.

• Onkyo takes no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or damage

of data resulting from the use of a USB device with the AV

receiver. Onkyo recommends that you back up your important

music files beforehand.

• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the USB port, Onkyo

recommends that you use its AC adapter to power it.

• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not supported.

Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub.

• USB devices with security functions are not supported.

The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using

network connection on the rear panel.

Note

• Make sure your AV receiver and TV are turned on and an

Ethernet cable is connected to the rear panel of the AV receiver.

• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver while it is being

updated.

• Never plug or unplug an HDMI or Ethernet cable during the

update process.

• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it

is being updated.

• Never unplug the power cord during the update process.

• It takes up to 60 minutes to complete the firmware update.

• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update is

finished.

Before Starting

• Set the “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting to “Off”

(➔page 75).

• Turn off the controller device connected via RS232 and

Ethernet cable.

• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.

• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio,

iPod/iPhone, USB or servers, etc.

Limitation of liability

The program and accompanying online documentation

are furnished to you for use at your own risk. Onkyo will

not be liable and you will have no remedy for damages

for any claim of any kind whatsoever concerning your

use of the program or the accompanying online

documentation, regardless of legal theory, and whether

arising in tort or contract. In no event will Onkyo be

liable to you or any third party for any special, indirect,

incidental, or consequential damages of any kind,

including, but not limited to, compensation,

reimbursement or damages on account of the loss of

present or prospective profits, loss of data, or for any

other reason whatsoever.

See the Onkyo web site for latest information.

Updating the Firmware via Network

Appendix

En-98

Update Procedure Troubleshooting

Case 1:

If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV

receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the front

display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the following

table and take appropriate action.

■Errors during an update via network

Case 2:

If an error occurs during the update process, disconnect

then reconnect the AC power cord and try again.

Case 3:

If you do not have an Internet connection to the network,

please contact Onkyo Support (➔page 100).

1Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the remote

controller.

The Home menu appears on the TV screen.

2Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.

Note that the “Firmware Update” option will be

grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver is

turned on. Please wait until it becomes operable.

3Select “Update via NET” and press ENTER.

Note that this option will not be available if there is no

firmware file newer than the currently installed

version.

4Select “Update” and press ENTER.

The update process will begin.

During the update process, the on-screen display may

disappear depending on the updated program. When

this occurs, you can still view the update progress on

the AV receiver’s display. The on-screen display will

reappear after the update is complete, and upon

turning the AV receiver off and on again.

5The message “Completed!” appears on the AV

receiver’s display, indicating that the update has

been completed.

6Turn off the AV receiver using 8ON/STANDBY on

the front panel.

Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote controller.

Once turned off, the AV receiver will automatically

turn on again.

Congratulations! You now have the latest firmware

installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.

Error Code Description

*-10, *-20 The Ethernet cable was not detected.

Reconnect the cable properly.

*-11, *-13, *-21,

*-28

Internet connection error.

Check the following items:

• Make sure the IP address, subnet mask,

gateway address, and DNS server are

configured properly.

• Make sure the router is turned on.

• Make sure the AV receiver and the router are

connected with an Ethernet cable.

• Make sure your router is configured properly.

See the instruction manual of the router.

• If your network allows only one client

connection and there is any other device

already connected, the AV receiver will not be

able to access the network. Consult your

Internet Service Provider (ISP).

• If your modem does not function as a router,

you will need a router. Depending on your

network, you may need to configure the proxy

server if necessary. See the document

provided by your ISP. If you are still unable to

access the Internet, the DNS or proxy server

may be temporarily down. Contact your ISP.

Others Retry the update procedure from the beginning.

If the error persists, please contact Onkyo

Support (➔page 100) and provide the error

code.

Appendix

En-99

The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using a

USB device.

Note

• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver during the update

process.

• Never plug or unplug an HDMI cable or a USB device during the

update process.

• Never unplug the USB storage device containing the firmware

file or the AC power cord during the update process.

• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it

is being updated.

• It takes up to 60 minutes to complete the firmware update.

• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update is

finished.

Before Starting

•Set the “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting to “Off”

(➔page 75).

• Turn off the controller device connected via Ethernet

cable.

• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.

• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio,

iPod/iPhone, USB or servers, etc.

• If there is any data in the USB device, remove it first.

Update Procedure

Updating the Firmware via USB

1Connect a USB device to your PC. If there is any

data in the USB device, remove it first.

2Download the firmware file from the Onkyo web

site. The file name is as follows:

ONKAVR****_************.zip

Unzip the downloaded file. The following five files

are created:

ONKAVR****_************.of1

ONKAVR****_************.of2

ONKAVR****_************.of3

ONKAVR****_************.of4

ONKAVR****_************.of5

3Copy the extracted files to the USB device. Be

careful not to copy the zip file.

4Remove the USB device from your PC and connect

it to the USB port on the AV receiver.

When the AV receiver has two USB ports, you can

use either one.

5Make sure the AV receiver and TV are turned on.

If the AV receiver is in standby mode, press

8ON/STANDBY on the AV receiver to light up the

front display.

6Select the USB input source.

“Now Initializing...” appears on the AV receiver’s

display and then the name of the USB device is

displayed. It takes 20 to 30 seconds to recognize the

USB device.

7Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the remote

controller.

The Home menu appears on the TV screen.

8Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.

9Select “Update via USB” and press ENTER.

Note that this option will not be available if there is no

firmware file newer than the currently installed

version.

Select “Update” and press ENTER.

The update process will begin.

During the update process, the on-screen display may

disappear depending on the updated program. When

this occurs, you can still view the update progress on

the AV receiver’s display. The on-screen display will

reappear after the update is complete, and upon

turning the AV receiver off and on again.

Do not turn off the AV receiver and do not remove the

USB device during the update process.

The message “Completed!” appears on the AV

receiver’s display, indicating that the update has

been completed.

Remove the USB device.

Turn off the AV receiver using 8ON/STANDBY on

the front panel.

Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote controller.

Once turned off, the AV receiver will automatically

turn on again.

Congratulations! You now have the latest firmware

installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.

Appendix

En-100

Troubleshooting

Case 1:

If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV

receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the front

display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the following

table and take appropriate action.

■Errors during an update via USB

Case 2:

If an error occurs during the update process, disconnect

then reconnect the AC power cord and try again.

Error Code Description

*-10, *-20 The USB device was not detected. Make sure

the USB flash memory or USB cable is

properly connected to the USB port. If the USB

storage device has its own power supply, use it

to power the USB device.

*-14 The firmware file was not found in the root

folder of the USB device, or the firmware file is

for another model. Retry and download the file

on the support page of the web site, following

the on-site instructions. If the error persists,

please contact Onkyo Support and provide the

error code.

Others Retry the update procedure from the beginning.

If the error persists, please contact Onkyo

Support and provide the error code.

China, Hong Kong

Unit 1033, 10/F, Star House, No 3, Salisbury Road, Tsim

Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong.

Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039

http://www.onkyochina.com

Asia, Oceania, Middle East, Africa

Please contact an Onkyo distributor referring to Onkyo

SUPPORT site.

http://www.intl.onkyo.com/support/firmware/index.html

Europe

Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY

Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4208-213

http://www.eu.onkyo.com/

2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN

http://www.onkyo.com/

The Americas

The above-mentioned information is subject to change

without prior notice. Visit the Onkyo web site for the latest

update.

18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.

For Dealer, Service, Order and all other Business Inquiries:

Tel: 201-785-2600

Fax: 201-785-2650

Hours:M-F 9am-5pm ET

http://www.us.onkyo.com/

For Product Support Team Only:

1-800-229-1687

Hours:M-F 9am-8pm / Sat-Sun 10am-8pm ET

http://www.us.onkyo.com/

Appendix

En-101

Connection Tips and

Video Signal Path

The AV receiver supports several connection formats for

compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The

format you choose will depend on the formats supported by

your components. Use the following sections as a guide.

Video components can be connected by using any one of

the following video connection formats: composite video,

PC IN (Analog RGB), component video, or HDMI, the

latter offering the best picture quality.

Tip

• For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video

signals pass through the system without upconversion (e.g.,

component video input passing through to component video

output).

• To by-pass the upconversion, set the “Picture Mode” setting to

“Direct” (➔page 70).

■“Monitor Out” set to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI

Sub”

Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as

shown, with composite video, PC IN (Analog RGB), and

component video sources all being upconverted for the

HDMI output. Use these settings if you connect either

HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB of the AV

receiver to your TV.

The composite video and component video outputs pass

through their respective input signals as they are.

■“Monitor Out” set to “Both”

Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as

shown, with composite video, PC IN (Analog RGB), and

component video sources all being upconverted for both

HDMI outputs. Use this setting if you connect both

HDMI OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB of the AV

receiver to your TV.

Note that video signals are output from both HDMI outputs

at the resolution supported by both TVs.

The composite video and component video outputs pass

through their respective input signals as they are.

Note

• When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both”, the “Resolution” setting

cannot be selected.

The on-screen setup menus appear only on a TV that

is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is

connected to other video outputs, use the AV

receiver’s display when changing settings.

Video Connection Formats

MONITOR OUT

Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.

AV receiver

TV, projector, etc.

Composite

Component

Video Signal Flow Chart

HDMIPC IN

(Analog RGB)

HDMI

MONITOR OUT

Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.

AV receiver

TV, projector, etc.

Composite

Component

Video Signal Flow Chart

HDMI

PC IN

(Analog RGB)

Appendix

En-102

■Signal Selection

If signals are present at more than one input, the inputs will

be selected automatically in the following order of priority:

HDMI, component video, composite video.

However, for component video only, regardless of whether

a component video signal is actually present, if a

component video input is assigned to the input selector,

that component video input will be selected. And if no

component video input is assigned to the input selector,

this will be interpreted as no component video signal being

present.

In the Signal Selection Example shown below, video

signals are present at both the HDMI and composite video

inputs. However, the HDMI signal is automatically

selected as the source and the video is output by the HDMI

output.

Audio components can be connected by using any of the

following audio connection formats: analog, optical,

coaxial, or HDMI.

When choosing a connection format, bear in mind that the

AV receiver does not convert digital input signals for

analog line outputs and vice versa.

If signals are present at more than one input, the inputs will

be selected automatically in the following order of priority:

HDMI, digital, analog.

*1 Depends on the “Audio TV Out” setting (➔page 75).

*2 This is possible when “Audio Return Channel” is set to

“Auto” (➔page 76), the TV/CD input selector is selected,

and your TV is ARC capable.

Tip

• When a signal is input via HDMI and the corresponding input

selector is selected, the HDMI indicator lights. In the case of an

optical or coaxial connection, the DIGITAL indicator lights. In

the case of an analog connection, neither of the HDMI and

DIGITAL indicators light.

MONITOR OUT

Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.

AV receiver

TV, projector, etc.

Composite

Component

Signal Selection Example

HDMI

Audio Connection Formats

OUT

Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.

AV receiver

TV, projector, etc.

HDMICoaxial Analog

Audio Signal Flow Chart

HDMI

Optical

*1 *1 *1

*1 *2

Appendix

En-103

The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by the AV receiver.

NTSC/PAL

✔: Output available

*1 Available resolutions: [640 × 480 60 Hz], [800 × 600 60 Hz], [1024 × 768 60 Hz], [1280 × 1024 60 Hz]

*2 Supported resolutions: [3840 × 2160 24/25/30 Hz], [4096 × 2160 24 Hz]

*3 When video signals of personal computers connected to PC IN are output from HDMI OUT SUB, they may not display properly on some TVs.

*4 Supported resolutions for HDMI OUT SUB (“Monitor Out” = “Sub”).

*5 Supported resolutions for HDMI OUT SUB (“Monitor Out” = “Both”).

Video Resolution Chart

HDMI Component Composite

4K*2 1080p/24 1080p 1080i 720p 480p/576p 480i/576i 1080p 1080i 720p 480p/576p 480i/576i 480i/576i

HDMI 1080p/24 ✔✔*4

1080p ✔✔ ✔*4

1080i ✔✔ ✔✔*4 ✔

720p ✔✔ ✔✔✔*4

480p/576p ✔✔ ✔✔✔✔*4

480i/576i ✔✔ ✔✔✔✔ ✔*4

Component 1080p ✔✔✔

*4*5 ✔

1080i ✔✔✔

*5 ✔*4*5 ✔✔

720p ✔✔✔

*5 ✔*5 ✔*4*5 ✔

480p/576p ✔✔✔

*5 ✔*5 ✔*5 ✔*4*5 ✔

480i/576i ✔✔✔

*5 ✔*5 ✔*5 ✔*4*5 ✔*5 ✔

Composite 480i/576i ✔✔✔

*5 ✔*5 ✔*5 ✔*4*5 ✔*5 ✔

PC IN (Analog RGB)*1*3 ✔✔✔

*5 ✔*5 ✔*5 ✔*5

Output

Input

Appendix

En-104

Using an RIHD-

compatible TV, Player,

or Recorder

p, which stands for Remote Interactive over

HDMI, is the name of the system control function found on

Onkyo components. The AV receiver can be used with

CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows

system control over HDMI and is part of the HDMI

standard. CEC provides interoperability between various

components, however, operation with components other

than p-compatible components cannot be

guaranteed.

The following components are p-compatible (As

of January 2012).

■TV

• Toshiba TV

•Sharp TV

■Players/Recorders

• Onkyo and Integra p-compatible players

• Toshiba players and recorders

• Sharp players and recorders (only when used together

with Sharp TV)

*Models other than those mentioned above may have some

interoperability if compatible with CEC, which is part of the

HDMI Standard, but operation cannot be guaranteed.

Note

• For proper linked operations, do not connect more p-

compatible components than the quantities specified below, to

the HDMI input terminal.

– Blu-ray Disc/DVD players: up to three.

– Blu-ray Disc/DVD recorders/Digital Video Recorders: up to

three.

– Cable/Satellite Set-top boxes: up to four.

• Do not connect the AV receiver to another AV receiver/AV

amplifier via HDMI.

• Proper linked operations are not guaranteed when more

p-compatible components than the above-mentioned

quantities are connected.

■For p-compatible TV

The following linked operations are enabled by connecting

the AV receiver to an p-compatible TV.

• The AV receiver will enter standby mode when the TV is

set to standby.

• You can set on the menu screen of the TV to either output

the audio from the speakers connected to the AV

receiver, or from the speakers of the TV.

• It is possible to output the audio coming from the tuner or

auxiliary input of your TV to the speakers of the AV

receiver. (A connection such as an optical digital cable or

similar is required in addition to the HDMI cable.)

• Input to the AV receiver can be selected with the remote

controller of the TV.

• Operations such as volume adjustment or similar for the

AV receiver can be performed from the remote controller

of the TV.

■For p-compatible players/recorders

The following linked operations are enabled by connecting

the AV receiver to an p-compatible

player/recorder.

• When playback is started on the player/recorder, AV

receiver will switch to the HDMI input of the

player/recorder that is playing back.

• Operation of the player/recorder is possible using the

remote controller supplied with the AV receiver.

*Depending on the model used, not all operations may be

available.

About p-Compatible Components Operations that can be performed with

p connection

To be continued

Appendix

En-105

■How to connect and setup

1Confirm the connection and settings.

1. Connect the HDMI OUT MAIN jack to the HDMI

input jack of the TV.

2. Connect the audio output from the TV to the

OPTICAL IN 2 jack of the AV receiver using an

optical digital cable.

Note

• When the audio return channel (ARC) function is used with

an ARC capable TV, this connection is not necessary

(➔page 76).

3. Connect the HDMI output of the Blu-ray

Disc/DVD player/recorder to the HDMI IN 1 jack

of the AV receiver.

Note

• It is necessary to assign the HDMI input when connecting

the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player/recorder to other jacks

(➔page 58). Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD

selector at this time, otherwise appropriate CEC (Consumer

Electronics Control) operation will not be guaranteed.

Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.

AV receiver

TV, projector, etc.

DIGITAL AUDIO

connection

(OPTICAL)

HDMI

connection

HDMI

connection

2Change each item in the “HDMI” menu according

to the following settings:

•HDMI Control(RIHD): On

•Audio Return Channel (ARC): Auto

See details of each setting (➔pages 75, 76).

3Confirm the settings.

1. Turn on the power for all connected components.

2. Turn off the power of the TV, and confirm that the

power of the connected components is turned off

automatically with the link operation.

3. Turn on the power of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD

player/recorder.

4. Start playback on the Blu-ray Disc/DVD

player/recorder, and verify the following:

• The AV receiver automatically turns on, and

selects the input to which the Blu-ray

Disc/DVD player/recorder is connected.

• The TV automatically turns on, and selects the

input to which the AV receiver is connected.

5. Following the operating instructions of the TV,

select “Use the TV speakers” from the menu

screen of the TV, and confirm that the audio is

output from the speakers of the TV, and not from

the speakers connected to the AV receiver.

6. Select “Use the speakers connected from the AV

receiver” from the menu screen of the TV, and

confirm that the audio is output from the speakers

connected to the AV receiver, and not from the

TV speakers.

Note

• Perform the above operations when you use the AV receiver

for the first time, when the settings of each component are

changed, when the main power of each component is turned

off, when the power cable is disconnected from the power

supply, or when there has been a power outage.

4Operate with the remote controller.

For buttons that can be operated (➔page 87).

Note

• Audio from DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD may not output

from the TV speakers. You will be able to output the audio

from the TV speakers by setting the audio output of the

DVD player to 2ch PCM. (It may not be possible depending

on the player models.)

• Even if you set to output audio on the TV speakers, audio

will be output from the speakers connected to the AV

receiver when you adjust the volume or switch the input on

the AV receiver. To output audio from the TV speakers, re-

do the corresponding operations on the TV.

• In case of an p connection with u and u audio

control compatible components, do not connect the u

cable at the same time.

• On the TV, when you select anything other than the HDMI

jack to which the AV receiver is connected, the input on the

AV receiver will be switched to “TV/CD”.

• The AV receiver will automatically power on in conjunction

when it determines it to be necessary. Even if the AV

receiver is connected to an p compatible TV or

player/recorder, it will not power on if it is not necessary. It

may not power on in conjunction when the TV is set to

output audio from the TV.

• Linked functions with the AV receiver may not work

depending on the component model connected. In such

cases, operate the AV receiver directly.

Appendix

En-106

About HDMI

Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV,

HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new

digital interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors,

Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video

components. Until now, several separate video and audio

cables have been required to connect AV components.

With HDMI, a single cable can carry control signals,

digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-

channel PCM, multichannel digital audio, and

multichannel PCM).

The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible

with DVI (Digital Visual Interface)*1, so TVs and displays

with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-

DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and

displays, resulting in no picture.)

The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital

Content Protection)*2, so only HDCP-compatible

components can display the picture.

• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)

• Multichannel linear PCM (up to 7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit)

• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,

Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS-HD Master Audio)

Your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player must also support the

HDMI output of the above audio formats.

The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital

Content Protection)*2, a copy-protection system for digital

video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver

via HDMI must also support HDCP.

*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface

standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.

*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The

video encryption technology developed by Intel for

HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to protect video content and requires

a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.

*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel,

Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon

Image, this open industry group’s objective is to address the

industry’s requirements for a digital connectivity specification

for high-performance PCs and digital displays.

Note

• The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual

Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can be

connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (Note that

DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need to make a

separate connection for audio.) However, reliable operation with

such an adapter is not guaranteed. In addition, video signals from

a PC are not supported.

• The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may be

restricted by the connected source component. If the picture is

poor or there’s no sound from a component connected via HDMI,

check its setup. Refer to the connected component’s instruction

manual for details.

The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the

following:

Audio Return Channel, 3D, x.v.Color, DeepColor, Lip

Sync, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

DSD and Multichannel PCM.

Supported Audio Formats About Copyright Protection

Appendix

En-107

Network/USB Features

The following diagram shows how you can connect the AV

receiver to your home network. In this example, it’s

connected to a LAN port on a router, which has a 4-port

100Base-TX switch built-in.

■Ethernet Network

For the best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet

network is recommended. Although it’s possible to play

music on a computer that’s connected to the network

wirelessly, playback may be unreliable, so it is

recommended to use wired connections.

■Ethernet Router

A router manages the network, data-routing and supplying

of IP addresses. Your router must support the following:

• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows

several networked computers to access the Internet

simultaneously via a single Internet connection. The AV

receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.

• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). DHCP

supplies IP addresses to the network devices, allowing

them to configure themselves automatically.

• A router with a built-in 100Base-TX switch is

recommended.

Some routers have a built-in modem, and some Internet

Service Providers (ISP) require you to use specific routers.

Please consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re

unsure.

■CAT5 Ethernet cable

Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to

connect the AV receiver to your home network.

■Internet Access (for Internet radio)

To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must have

Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,

56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results,

so a broadband connection is strongly recommended (e.g.,

cable modem, xDSL modem, etc.). Please consult your ISP

or computer dealer if you’re unsure.

Note

• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your broadband

Internet connection must be working and able to access the Web.

Consult your ISP if you have any problems with your Internet

connection.

• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network settings

automatically. If you want to configure these settings manually,

see “Network” (➔page 76).

• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so if you have

a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must use a PPPoE-

compatible router.

• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a proxy server

to use Internet radio. If your computer is configured to use a

proxy server, use the same settings for the AV receiver

(➔page 77).

Connecting to the Network

WAN

LAN

Modem

Router

Computer or media server

Internet radio

Network Requirements

Appendix

En-108

■Server playback

The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on a

computer or media server and supports the following

technologies:

• Windows Media Player 11

• Windows Media Player 12

• Windows Media Connect 2.0

• DLNA-certified media server

If the operating system of your computer is Windows

Vista, Windows Media Player 11 is already installed.

Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP can be

downloaded for free from the Microsoft web site.

• The computer or media server must be on the same

network as the AV receiver.

• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders may

be nested up to 16 levels deep.

Note

• Depending on the media server, the AV receiver may not

recognize it, or may not be able to play its music files.

■Remote playback

• Windows Media Player 12

• DLNA-certified (within DLNA Interoperability

Guidelines version 1.5) media server or controller device.

The setting varies depending on the media server or

controller devices. Refer to your devices’ instruction

manual for details.

If the operating system of your personal computer is

Windows 7, Windows Media Player 12 is already installed.

For more information, see the Microsoft web site.

• USB mass storage device class (but not always

guaranteed).

• FAT16 or FAT32 file system format.

• If the storage device has been partitioned, each section

will be treated as an independent device.

• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders may

be nested up to 16 levels deep.

• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not

supported.

Note

• If the media you connect is not supported, the message “No

Storage” will be displayed.

• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV receiver’s USB

port, we recommend that you use its AC adapter to power it.

• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that support the

USB Mass Storage Class standard, which allows USB devices to

be connected to computers without the need for special drivers or

software. Note that not all USB MP3 players support the USB

Mass Storage Class standard. Refer to your USB MP3 player’s

instruction manual for details.

• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot be played.

• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or

damage to data stored on a USB device when that device is used

with the AV receiver. We recommend that you back up your

important music files beforehand.

• MP3 players containing music files that are managed with special

music software are not supported.

• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which includes

the ability to power them.

• Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub. The USB device

must be connected directly to the AV receiver’s USB port.

• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver make

take a while to read it.

• USB devices with security functions cannot be played.

Server Requirements Minimum system requirements for Windows Media

Player 11 on Windows XP

Operating system

Windows XP Home Edition (SP2), Windows XP

Professional (SP2), Windows XP Tablet PC Edition

(SP2), Update Rollup 2 for Windows XP Media Center

Edition 2005 (KB900325), October 2006 Update Rollup

for Windows XP Media Center Edition (KB925766)

Processor: 233 MHz Intel Pentium II, Advanced

Micro Devices (AMD), etc.

Memory: 64 MB

Hard disk: 200 MB of free space

Drive: CD or DVD drive

Modem: 28.8 kbps

Sound card: 16-bit sound card

Monitor: Super VGA (800 x 600)

Video card: 64 MB VRAM, DirectX 9.0b

Software: Microsoft ActiveSync (only when

using a Windows Mobile-based Pocket

PC or smartphone)

Web browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or

Netscape 7.1

USB Device Requirements

Appendix

En-109

For server playback and playback from a USB device, the

AV receiver supports the following music file formats.

Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. However,

playback times may not display correctly.

Note

• With remote playback, the AV receiver does not support the

following music file formats: FLAC and Ogg Vorbis.

• In the case of server playback, the above-mentioned file formats

may not be played depending on the server type.

■MP3 (.mp3 or .MP3)

• MP3 files must be MPEG-1/MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3

format with sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz,

12 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,

48 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps and 320 kbps.

Incompatible files cannot be played.

■WMA (.wma or .WMA)

WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an audio

compression technology developed by Microsoft

Corporation. Audio can be encoded in WMA format by

using Windows Media® Player.

• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.

• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, bitrates of

between 5 kbps and 320 kbps, and WMA DRM are

supported.

• WMA Pro/Voice formats are not supported.

■WMA Lossless (.wma or .WMA)

• Sampling rates of 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz

are supported.

• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit

■WAV (.wav or .WAV)

WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.

• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,

88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.

• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit

■AAC

(.aac/.m4a/.mp4/.3gp/.3g2/.AAC/.M4A/.MP4/

.3GP or .3G2)

AAC stands for MPEG-2/MPEG-4 Audio.

• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,

88.2 kHz, 96 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps and

320 kbps are supported.

■FLAC (.flac or .FLAC)

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression.

• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,

88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.

• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit

■Ogg Vorbis (.ogg or .OGG)

• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and

bitrates of between 48 kbps and 500 kbps are supported.

Incompatible files cannot be played.

■LPCM (Linear PCM)

• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,

88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are supported.

• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit

*Only for playback via network.

■Apple Lossless (.m4a/.mp4/.M4A/.MP4)

• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,

88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are supported.

• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit

■DSD (.dsf or .DSF)

• The sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz is supported.

■Dolby True HD (.vr/.mlp/.VR/.MLP)

• Sampling rates of 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz,

176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.

The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international,

cross-industry collaboration. Members of DLNA develop a

concept of wired and wireless interoperable networks

where digital content such as photos, music, and videos can

be shared through consumer electronics, personal

computers, and mobile devices in and beyond the home.

The AV receiver complies with the DLNA Interoperability

Guidelines version 1.5.

Supported Audio File Formats

About DLNA

Appendix

En-110

License and Trademark

Information

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No's: 5,956,674,

5,974,380, 5,978,762, 6,487,535, 6,226,616, 7,212,872,

7,003,467, 7,272,567, 7,668,723, 7,392,195, 7,333,929,

7,548,853 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued and

pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol

together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a

trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby,

Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Music Optimizer™ is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.

“HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia

Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of

HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.”

InstaPrevue and the InstaPrevue logo are trademarks or

registered trademarks of Silicon Image, Inc. in the United States

and other countries.

THX and the THX logo are trademarks of THX Ltd. which may

iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, and

iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.

and other countries.

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic

accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or

iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to

meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for

the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and

regulatory standards.

Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone

may affect wireless performance.

Apple TV is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and

other countries.

THX Select2 Plus

Before any home theater component can be

THX Select2 Plus certified, it must pass a rigorous series

of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product

feature the THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your

guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase

will give you superb performance for many years to

come. THX Select2 Plus requirements define hundreds

of parameters, including power amplifier performance,

and pre-amplifier performance and operation for both

digital and analog domains. THX Select2 Plus receivers

also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g., THX

Mode) which accurately translate movie soundtracks for

home theater playback.

Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™, Inc.

U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ®XT32,

Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and

Audyssey DSX® are registered trademarks of

Audyssey Laboratories, Inc.

“DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are

trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital

Living Network Alliance.”

Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Microsoft

group of companies.

Qdeo and QuietVideo are trademarks of Marvell or its affiliates.

HQV® (Hollywood Quality Video) is a trademark of

Qualcomm Incorporated.

“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.

“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.

Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of

THX Ltd.

“MHL, the MHL Logo, and Mobile High-Definition Link are

trademark or registered trademarks of MHL LLC in the United

States and other counties.”

Appendix

En-111

Specifications

Amplifier Section

Video Section

Tuner Section

General

■HDMI

■Video Inputs

■Video Outputs

■Audio Inputs

■Audio Outputs

■Others

Specifications and features are subject to change

without notice.

Rated Output Power

All channels: (North American)

135 watts minimum continuous power per

channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels driven

from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a maximum

total harmonic distortion of 0.08% (FTC)

(Others)

7 ch × 180 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven

of 1% (IEC)

Maximum Effective Output Power

(Asian)

7 ch × 230 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven

(JEITA)

Dynamic Power*

* IEC60268-Short-term maximum output power

300 W (3 Ω, Front)

250 W (4 Ω, Front)

150 W (8 Ω, Front)

THD+N (Total Harmonic Distortion+Noise)

0.08% (20 Hz - 20 kHz, half power)

Damping Factor 60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 Ω)

Input Sensitivity and Impedance (Unbalance)

200 mV/47 kΩ (LINE)

2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)

Rated RCA Output Level and Impedance

200 mV/470 Ω (PRE OUT)

Maximum RCA Output Level and Impedance

4.6 V/470 Ω (PRE OUT)

Phono Overload 70 mV (MM 1 kHz 0.5%)

Frequency Response 5 Hz - 100 kHz/+1 dB, –3 dB (Direct mode)

Tone Control Characteristics

±10 dB, 50 Hz (BASS)

±10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)

Signal to Noise Ratio 110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)

80 dB (PHONO MM, IHF-A)

Speaker Impedance 4 Ω - 16 Ω

Input Sensitivity/Output Level and Impedance

1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component Y)

0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component PB/CB, PR/CR)

1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Composite)

Component Video Frequency Response

5 Hz - 100 MHz/+0 dB, –3 dB

FM Tuning Frequency Range

(North American) 87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz

(Others) 87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz, RDS

AM Tuning Frequency Range

522/530 kHz - 1611/1710 kHz

Preset Channel 40

Power Supply (North American) AC 120 V, 60 Hz

(Others) AC 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption (North American) 8.1 A

(Others) 720 W

No-sound Power Consumption

(North American) 95 W

(Others) 90 W

Stand-by Power Consumption

0.1 W

Dimensions (W × H × D)

435 mm × 198.5 mm × 435.5 mm

17-1/8" × 7-13/16" × 17-1/8"

Weight 18.3 kg (40.3 lbs.)

Input IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4, IN 5, IN 6, IN 7,

AUX INPUT

Output OUT MAIN, OUT SUB

Video Resolution 1080p

Audio Format Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio,

DVD-Audio, DSD

Supported 3D, Audio Return Channel, DeepColor,

x.v.Color, LipSync, CEC (RIHD)

Component IN 1, IN 2

Composite BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME 1,

AUX

Analog RGB PC IN

Component MONITOR OUT

Composite MONITOR OUT

Digital Optical: 2 (Rear), 1(Front)

Coaxial: 3

Analog BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME 1,

PC, TV/CD, PHONO, AUX

Analog ZONE2 LINE OUT, ZONE3 LINE OUT

Analog Multichannel Pre Outputs

Subwoofer Pre Outputs

Speaker Outputs Main (L, R, C, SL, SR, SBL, SBR) + Front

Wide/ZONE2 (L, R) + Front High/ZONE3

(L, R)

Phones 1 (6.3 ø)

Setup Mic 1

RS232 1

RI 1

USB 1 (Front)/1 (Rear)

Ethernet 1

IR Input 1

IR Output 1

12 V Trigger Out 2

2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN

Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8163

http://www.onkyo.com/

18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.

Tel: 800-229-1687, 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650

http://www.us.onkyo.com/

Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY

Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4208-213

http://www.eu.onkyo.com/

The Coach House 81A High Street, Marlow, Buckinghamshire, SL7 1AB, UK

Tel: +44-(0)1628-473-350 Fax: +44-(0)1628-401-700

Unit 1033, 10/F, Star House, No 3, Salisbury Road, Tsim Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong.

Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039

http://www.onkyochina.com/

1301, 555 Tower, No.555 West NanJin Road, Jin an, Shanghai,

China 200041, Tel: 86-21-52131366 Fax: 86-21-52130396

http://www.cn.onkyo.com/

SN 29401132EN

* 2 9 4 0 1 1 3 2 E N *

Y1203-1

Using Internet Radio

En-1

Using Internet Radio

Note

• Available services may vary depending on the region.

Common Procedures in Internet Radio

1Press NET.

A list of the network services appears, and the NET

indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet

cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.

2Select the desired service and press ENTER.

The top page of the selected service appears.

Using Multiple Accounts

The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts, which

means you can freely switch between several logins.

After registering user accounts, login is performed from

the “Users” screen.

Tip

• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user

accounts.

• You can store up to 10 user accounts.

• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the

current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.

1Press MENU while the Users screen is displayed.

The following menu items appear:

Add new user:

Remove this user:

You can either store a new user account, or delete

an existing one.

Pandora® internet radio –Getting Started

(U.S. only) .................................................2

Using Rhapsody (U.S. only).......................... 3

Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio (North

American only) .........................................4

Using Last.fm Internet Radio........................ 5

Using Slacker Personal Radio...................... 6

Using MP3tunes.............................................7

Using Internet Radio

En-2

Pandora is a free, personalized Internet radio service that

plays the music you know and helps you discover music

you’ll love.

PANDORA, the PANDORA logo, and the Pandora trade

dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora

Media, Inc. Used with permission.

Pandora® internet radio

–Getting Started (U.S. only)

1Use q/w to select “I have a Pandora Account” or

“I’m new to Pandora” and then press ENTER.

If you are new to Pandora select “I’m new to

Pandora”. You will see an activation code on your

TV screen. Please write down this code. Go to an

Internet connected computer and point your browser

to www.pandora.com/onkyo

Enter your activation code and then follow the

instructions to create your Pandora account and your

personalized Pandora Internet radio stations. You can

create your stations by entering your favorite songs

and artists when prompted. After you have created

your account and stations you can return to your

Onkyo receiver and press enter to begin listening to

your personalized Pandora Internet radio.

If you have an existing Pandora account, you can add

your Pandora account to your Onkyo receiver by

selecting “I have a Pandora Account” and logging in

with your email and password.

Tip

• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using

Multiple Accounts” (➔page 1). Login can be made from

the “Users” screen.

2To play a station, use q/w to select the station from

your station list, and then press ENTER.

Playback starts and the playback screen appears.

Create a New Station:

Enter the name of a song, artist, or genre and Pandora

will create a unique radio station for you based on the

musical qualities of that song, artist, or genre.

■Menu Items

I like this song:

Give a song “thumbs-up” and Pandora will play more

music like it.

I don’t like this song:

Give a song “thumbs-down” and Pandora will ban that

song from the current station.

Why is this song playing?:

Discover some of the musical attributes that Pandora

uses to create your personal radio stations.

Don’t play the song for a month:

If you are tired of a song, you can put the song to sleep

and Pandora will not play it for one month.

Create station from this artist:

Creates a radio station from this artist.

Delete this station:

This will permanently delete a station from your

Pandora account. All of your thumbs feedback will be

lost should you choose to re-create the station with the

same song or artist.

Create station from this song:

Creates a radio station from this song.

Rename this station:

Lets you rename the current radio station.

Bookmark this artist:

Pandora will bookmark your favorite artist for your

profile on www.pandora.com.

Bookmark this song:

Pandora will bookmark the current song and allow

you to buy them all from Amazon or iTunes in one

step!

Add to My Favorites:

Adds a station to My Favorites list.

Using Internet Radio

En-3

Using Rhapsody (U.S. only)

1Use q/w to select “Sign in to your account” and then

press ENTER.

To use Rhapsody, you need an account. If you don’t

have one yet, you can create a new account at

www.rhapsody.com/onkyo

If you have an existing Rhapsody account, select

“Sign in to your account” and press ENTER.

Enter your user name (usually your email) and

password in the next keyboard screen, or in Web

Setup.

■Using the keyboard screen

1. Use q/w/e/r and ENTER to enter your user

name and password.

2. Select “OK”.

3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”

screen appears.

4. Press ENTER.

Tip

• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using

Multiple Accounts” (➔page 1). Login can be made from

the “Users” screen.

2Use q/w to select the menu, then press ENTER.

Search:

You can search for music by Artist, Album, or Track.

Music Guide:

You can play tracks from Genres, Top Artists, Top

Albums, Top Tracks, New Releases, and Staff Picks.

Rhapsody Channels:

Listen to radio channels programmed by Rhapsody’s

top-notch editors.

Playlists:

Play your own personal playlists.

My Library:

Bookmark your favorite albums and tracks from the

Rhapsody catalog using My Library.

Account Info:

Confirm your account information.

Sign Out:

Sign out from your Rhapsody account.

3Use q/w to select a channel, and press ENTER or

1 to start playback.

Playback starts and the playback screen appears.

You can control the tracks with the buttons on the

remote control.

Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7, 6,

RANDOM, REPEAT

Note

• On Rhapsody Channels, some of the buttons don’t work.

■Menu Items

Add track to My Library:

Bookmark currently-playing tracks.

Add album to My Library:

Bookmark currently-playing albums.

Add playlist to My Library:

Bookmark currently-playing playlists.

Add channel to My Channels:

Bookmark currently-playing Rhapsody radio

channels.

Add to My Favorites:

Adds a track, channel or playlist to My Favorites list.

Tip

• You can remove bookmarked tracks, albums, and Rhapsody

Channels from My Library.

Using Internet Radio

En-4

Your Onkyo AV receiver includes a free trial of SiriusXM

Internet Radio. The “Account Info” screen shows how

many days are left in your trial. After the trial period

expires, if you want to continue listening to the service,

you must subscribe. To subscribe go to

www.siriusxm.com/internetradio with your computer.

When you subscribe, you will be provided with a username

and password which has to be entered into the AV receiver.

To use SiriusXM Internet Radio, you must have your AV

receiver connected to the Internet. Using the remote

control, follow these steps:

SiriusXM Internet Radio subscriptions are sold separately

and are governed by the Sirius Terms and Conditions (see

www.sirius.com). Be sure to read this agreement before

you purchase your subscription. Sirius, XM and all related

marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio

(North American only) 1Use q/w to select “Sign In”, and then press ENTER.

If you have an existing SIRIUS account, you can sign

in by selecting “Sign In”. Enter your user name and

password in the next keyboard screen, or in Web

Setup. If you don’t know your username or password,

call Sirius XM at (888) 539-7474 for assistance.

Tip

• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using

Multiple Accounts” (➔page 1). Login can be made from

the “Users” screen.

■Using the keyboard screen

1. Use q/w/e/r and ENTER to enter your user

name and password.

2. Select “OK”.

3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”

screen appears.

4. Press ENTER.

“Please wait...” appears and then “SiriusXM

Internet Radio” screen appears which displays the

category available for selection.

2Use q/w to select the category and then press

ENTER.

The channel list screen for the selected category

appears.

3Use q/w to select the desired channel and then press

ENTER.

The playback screen for the selected channel appears

and you can listen to SiriusXM Internet Radio.

You can control the tracks with the buttons on the

remote control.

Enabled buttons: 2, 3, 7, 6

■Menu Items

Add to My Favorites:

Adds a channel to My Favorites list.

Using Internet Radio

En-5

Last.fm is a music service that learns what you love...

Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you have a

free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all the songs

you’ve just played. When you visit the Last.fm website,

you can see personal charts of the music you’ve enjoyed,

share them with friends and see what they like, too.

With thousands of biographies, reviews and an endless

choice of personalised, ad-free radio stations, Last.fm is a

great way to discover music. Pick up your free Last.fm

account today at www.last.fm/join

Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-free

Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without a

computer!

Recommended Radio:

Discover smart personalised recommendations that adapt

as your tastes change.

Artist Radio:

Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of music

inspired by your choice.

My Library:

Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music you’ve

heard since you joined Last.fm.

Tag Radio:

Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll

entertain you with it for hours.

Start your free trial straight away when you create your

account and see for yourself what it’s like to have the

world’s music at your fingertips. Latest prices and full

information are available at www.last.fm/subscribe

■Using scrobbling control

Use q/w to select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.

*Internet radio services provided by a third party may be

terminated with or without notice.

Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.

Using Last.fm Internet Radio 1Use q/w to select “Sign in to your account”, and

then press ENTER.

If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can sign

in to your account to select “Sign in to your

account”. Enter your user name and password in the

next keyboard screen.

■Using the keyboard screen

1. Use q/w/e/r and the ENTER to enter your user

name and password.

2. Select “OK”.

3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”

screen appears.

4. Press ENTER.

“Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm Internet

Radio” screen appears.

Tip

• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using

Multiple Accounts” (➔page 1). Login can be made from

the “Users” screen.

2Use q/w to select menu and then press ENTER.

Search Station:

You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User Name.

Top Artists Station:

You can play tracks of top-rated artists.

Top Tags Station:

You can play tracks of top-rated tags.

Personal Station:

•You can play tracks from personalized station

(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and

“Your Recommendations”).

Profile:

You can play tracks from “Recently Listened

Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.

Account Info:

Confirm your account information.

Sign Out:

It signs out from your account.

3Use q/w to select a station, and press ENTER or 1

to start playback.

Playback starts and the playback screen appears.

■Menu Items

I Love this track:

Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and

playback frequency increases.

Ban this track:

Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and

playback frequency reduces.

Add to My Favorites:

Adds a station to My Favorites list.

Using Internet Radio

En-6

Using Slacker Personal Radio

1If you do not have an account, create one on the

Slacker website (www.slacker.com) with your

computer.

If you already have a Slacker account, select “Sign

in to your account” and then press ENTER.

The keyboard screen appears. You can enter

information from the remote control or the keys on the

main unit.

2If there are no mistakes in the information you have

entered, use q/w/e/r to select “OK” then press

ENTER.

An account information confirmation screen appears.

3If you do not have an account, select “Access

without Sign In” and press ENTER to use a

restricted version of the service.

Note that use will be restricted.

Tip

• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using

Multiple Accounts” (➔page 1). Login can be made from

the “Users” screen.

4Use q/w to select a menu item and then press

ENTER.

To sign out, use q/w to select “Sign out” from this

screen and then press ENTER.

5Use q/w to select a station and then press ENTER

or 1 to start playback from the station.

The playback screen appears.

6You can control the tracks with the buttons on the

remote control.

Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 6

■Menu Items

Rate Song as Favorite:

Stores information to server, making it more likely

that the song will be played again.

Ban Song:

Stores information to server, making it less likely that

the song will be played again.

Ban Artist:

Stores information to server, making it less likely that

the songs from this artist will be played again.

Mark Favorite:

Adds the currently playing station to your favorites.

Unmark Favorite:

Deletes the currently playing station from your

favorites.

Add song to Library:

Adds the currently playing track to your library.

Delete song from Library:

Deletes the currently playing track from your library.

Add to My Favorites:

Adds a station or song to My Favorites list.

Using Internet Radio

En-7

Listen to your music collection on your home stereo in

complete digital fidelity without a personal computer plus

safely backup all your songs. Here’s how:

Creating an Account on your Computer

Playing Contents on the AV Receiver

Tip

• Before proceeding, you need to select the MP3tunes service as

described in “Common Procedures in Internet Radio Menu”

(➔page 1).

Using MP3tunes

1From your computer, open a web browser and go

to: www.mp3tunes.com/signup

2Create an account.

3Click the Upload link (www.mp3tunes.com/upload)

to add files to your Locker.

4View, edit and listen to your files by clicking on

Player (www.mp3tunes.com/player).

1Use q/w to select “Sign in to your account”, and

then press ENTER.

2Enter the e-mail address and password you used

when creating your account, select “OK” and press

ENTER.

The keyboard screen appears. You can enter your user

name and password from the remote controller or the

buttons on the AV receiver.

3If there are no mistakes in the information you have

entered, select “OK” and press ENTER.

An account information confirmation screen appears.

Tip

• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using

Multiple Accounts” (➔page 1). Login can be made from

the “Users” screen.

4Use q/w to select the menu, then press ENTER.

Music:

The place to find your Artists, Albums, and Playlists.

Shuffle:

Starts playing a random selection of tracks from your

Locker.

Search:

Find a specific Album, Artist, or Song.

Account Info:

Your MP3tunes account information.

Sign Out:

Log out of your MP3tunes account.

The track at the top of the music list is automatically

played back.

5Use q/w to select a track and press ENTER or 1

to start playback.

A playback screen appears.

You can control the tracks with the buttons on the

remote control.

Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 7, 6

■Menu Items

Go to Menu:

Displays additional menu options.

6You can view or change your MP3tunes account

settings by going to www.mp3tunes.com/account.

Utilisation d’une webradio

Fr-1

Utilisation d’une

webradio

Remarque

• Les services disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de la région.

Procédures courantes dans le menu de

webradio

1Appuyez sur NET.

Une liste des services réseau s’affiche, et le témoin

NET s’allume. S’il clignote, vérifiez que le câble

Ethernet est fermement branché sur l’ampli-tuner AV.

2Sélectionnez le service désiré et appuyez sur

ENTER.

La page principale du service sélectionné s’affiche.

Utilisation de plusieurs comptes

L’ampli-tuner AV prend en charge plusieurs comptes

utilisateur, ce qui signifie que vous pouvez librement

commuter entre plusieurs connexions. Après avoir

enregistré des comptes utilisateur, l’identification est

réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».

Conseil

• Certains des services ne permettent pas l’utilisation de

plusieurs comptes utilisateur.

• Vous pouvez stocker jusqu’à 10 comptes utilisateur.

• Pour commuter entre les comptes, vous devez d’abord vous

déconnecter du compte actuel, puis vous reconnectez depuis

l’écran « Users ».

1Appuyez sur MENU lorsque l’écran Users est

affiché.

Les éléments de menu suivants s’affichent :

Add new user :

Remove this user :

Vous pouvez soit stocker un nouveau compte

utilisateur, soit en supprimer un existant.

Pandora® internet Radio –Pour commencer

(États-Unis uniquement).......................... 2

Utilisation de Rhapsody (Etats-Unis

uniquement).............................................. 3

Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio

(Amérique du Nord uniquement) ............ 4

Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm................5

Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio ......... 6

Utilisation d’une webradio

Fr-2

Pandora est un service de radio en ligne libre et

personnalisé vous permettant de lire la musique que vous

connaissez et de découvrir celle que vous aimez.

PANDORA, le logo PANDORA, et l’habillage

commercial Pandora sont des marques commerciales ou

des marques déposées de la société Pandora Media, Inc.

Utilisées avec autorisation.

Pandora® internet Radio

–Pour commencer (États-Unis

uniquement)

1Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner « I have a Pandora

Account » ou « I’m new to Pandora », puis appuyez

sur ENTER.

Si vous ne connaissez pas Pandora sélectionnez « I’m

new to Pandora ». Un code d’activation apparaîtra

sur l’écran de votre téléviseur. Notez ce code. Utilisez

un ordinateur branché sur Internet et connectez le

navigateur à www.pandora.com/onkyo

Saisissez votre code d’activation puis suivez les

instructions pour créer votre compte Pandora et vos

stations webradio Pandora personnalisées. Lorsque

vous y êtes invités, vous pouvez créer vos stations en

saisissant vos chansons et vos artistes préférés. Après

la création de votre compte et de vos stations, vous

pouvez retourner à votre récepteur Onkyo et appuyez

sur entrée pour écouter votre webradio Pandora

personnalisée.

Si vous disposez d’un compte Pandora, vous pouvez

ajouter votre compte Pandora à votre récepteur Onkyo

en sélectionnant « I have a Pandora Account » et y

accéder en entrant votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de

passe.

Conseil

• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,

consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔page 1).

L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran

«Users ».

2Pour lire une station, utilisez q/w pour sélectionner

la station dans votre liste de stations, puis appuyez

sur ENTER.

La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.

Create a New Station :

Saisissez le nom d’une chanson, d’un artiste ou d’un

genre et Pandora créera une station radio unique pour

vous en fonction des qualités musicales de la chanson,

de l’artiste ou du genre choisi.

■Eléments du menu

I like this song :

Acceptez la chanson et Pandora lira d’autres musiques

similaires.

I don’t like this song :

Rejetez la chanson et Pandora éliminera cette chanson

de la station courante.

Why is this song playing? :

Découvrez certains des attributs musicaux que

Pandora utilise pour créer vos stations radio

personnelles.

Don’t play the song for a month :

Si vous en avez assez d’une chanson, vous pouvez

mettre la chanson « au repos » et Pandora ne la lira

plus pendant un mois.

Create station from this artist :

Permet de créer une station radio à partir de cet artiste.

Delete this station :

Ceci supprimera de façon permanente la station de

votre compte Pandora. Au cas où vous décideriez de

récréer la station avec les mêmes chansons ou les

mêmes artistes, tous vos acceptations/rejets précédents

seront perdus.

Create station from this song :

Permet de créer une station radio à partir de cette

chanson.

Rename this station :

Vous permet de renommer la station radio actuelle.

Bookmark this artist :

Pandora marquera votre artiste préféré pour votre

profil sur www.pandora.com.

Bookmark this song :

Pandora marquera la chanson en cours et vous

permettra de toutes les acheter sur Amazon ou iTunes

en une étape !

Add to My Favorites :

Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My Favorites.

Utilisation d’une webradio

Fr-3

Utilisation de Rhapsody (Etats-Unis

uniquement)

1Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner « Sign in to your

account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.

Vous devez posséder un compte pour utiliser

Rhapsody. Si vous ne disposez pas encore d’un

compte, vous pouvez en créer un à partir de

www.rhapsody.com/onkyo

Si vous possédez déjà un compte Rhapsody,

sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis

appuyez sur ENTER.

Saisissez votre nom utilisateur (en général votre

adresse électronique) et votre mot de passe dans

l’écran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration Web.

■Utilisation de l’écran clavier

1. Utilisez q/w/e/r et ENTER pour saisir votre

nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.

2. Sélectionnez « OK ».

3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm your

entries » s’affiche.

4. Appuyez sur ENTER.

Conseil

• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,

consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔page 1).

L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran

«Users ».

2Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner le menu, puis

appuyez sur ENTER.

Search :

Vous pouvez rechercher des morceaux par artiste, par

album ou par piste.

Music Guide :

Vous pouvez lire des pistes à partir des genres,des

meilleurs artistes, des meilleurs albums, des

meilleures pistes, des nouveautés et des sélections du

personnel.

Rhapsody Channels :

Écoutez les canaux de radio programmée par les

meilleurs éditeurs de Rhapsody.

Playlists :

Permet de jouer vos listes de lecture personnelles.

My Library :

Marquez vos albums et vos pistes personnelles dans le

catalogue de Rhapsody à l’aide de My Library.

Account Info :

Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.

Sign Out :

Déconnectez-vous de votre compte Rhapsody.

3Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner un canal, puis

appuyez sur ENTER ou 1 pour démarrer la

lecture.

La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.

Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les touches sur

la télécommande.

Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7, 6,

RANDOM, REPEAT

Remarque

• Sur les canaux Rhapsody, certaines touches ne fonctionnent

pas.

■Eléments du menu

Add track to My Library :

Marquez les pistes en cours de lecture.

Add album to My Library :

Marquez les albums en cours de lecture.

Add playlist to My Library :

Marquez les listes de lecture en cours de lecture.

Add channel to My Channels :

Marquez les canaux de radio Rhapsody en cours de

lecture.

Add to My Favorites :

Permet d’ajouter une piste, un canal ou une liste de

lecture à la liste My Favorites.

Conseil

• Vous pouvez supprimer des pistes, des albums et des canaux

Rhapsody marqués de My Library.

Utilisation d’une webradio

Fr-4

Votre ampli-tuner AV Onkyo comprend un essai gratuit de

SiriusXM Internet Radio. L’écran « Account Info » affiche

le nombre de jours restants dans votre essai. Une fois la

période d’essai expirée, si vous souhaitez continuer à

écouter le service, vous devez vous abonner. Pour vous

inscrire, accédez à l’adresse

www.siriusxm.com/internetradio à l’aide de votre

ordinateur.

Lorsque vous vous inscrivez, vous devez fournir un nom

est un mot de passe utilisateur qui doivent être saisis dans

l’ampli-tuner AV.

Pour utiliser SiriusXM Internet Radio, l’ampli-tuner AV

doit être connecté à Internet. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous à

l’aide de la télécommande :

Les abonnements SiriusXM Internet Radio sont vendus

séparément et sont subordonnés par les conditions Sirius

(voir www.sirius.com). Assurez-vous de lire cet accord

avant d’acquérir votre abonnement. Sirius, XM et tous les

logos et marques afférents sont des marques déposées de

Sirius XM Radio Inc. et de ses filiales. Tous droits

réservés.

Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio

(Amérique du Nord uniquement) 1Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner « Sign In », puis

appuyez sur ENTER.

Si vous possédez déjà un compte SIRIUS, vous

pouvez y accéder en sélectionnant « Sign In ».

Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot de passe

dans l’écran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration

Web. Si vous ne connaissez pas votre nom

d’utilisateur ou votre mot de passe, appelez Sirius XM

au (888) 539-7474 pour obtenir une assistance.

Conseil

• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,

consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔page 1).

L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran

«Users ».

■Utilisation de l’écran clavier

1. Utilisez q/w/e/r et ENTER pour saisir votre

nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.

2. Sélectionnez « OK ».

3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm your

entries » s’affiche.

4. Appuyez sur ENTER.

«Please wait... » s’affiche, puis l’écran « SiriusXM

Internet Radio » affiche la catégorie que vous

pouvez sélectionner.

2Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner la catégorie, puis

appuyez sur ENTER.

L’écran de la liste des canaux de la catégorie

sélectionnée s’affiche.

3Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner le canal de votre

choix, puis appuyez sur ENTER.

L’écran de lecture du canal sélectionné s’affiche et

vous pouvez écouter SiriusXM Internet Radio.

Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les touches sur

la télécommande.

Boutons activés : 2, 3, 7, 6

■Eléments du menu

Add to My Favorites :

Permet d’ajouter un canal à la liste My Favorites.

Utilisation d’une webradio

Fr-5

Last.fm un service de musique qui apprend ce que vous

aimez…

Votre nouvel ampli-tuner AV Onkyo est très intelligent. Si

vous avez un compte Last.fm gratuit, il garde une trace de

toutes les chansons que vous avez juste jouées. Quand vous

vous rendez sur le site Web de Last.fm, vous pouvez voir

les graphiques personnels de la musique que vous avez

appréciée, les partagez avec vos amis et également voir ce

qu’ils aiment.

Avec des milliers de biographies, de revues et un choix

infini de stations de radio personnalisées et sans pub,

Last.fm est excellent moyen de découvrir de la musique.

Créez aujourd’hui votre compte Last.fm gratuit sur

www.last.fm/join

Inscrivez-vous et vous pourrez apprécier le meilleur de la

radio sans pub Last.fm sur votre ampli-tuner AV Onkyo

sans ordinateur !

Recommended Radio :

Découvrez les recommandations personnalisées futées qui

changent en même temps que vos goûts.

Artist Radio :

Sélectionnez n’importe quel artiste et nous vous jouerons

une station entière de musique inspirée par votre choix.

My Library :

Reposez-vous de retour et appréciez les sélections à partir

de toute la musique que vous avez entendue depuis que

vous avez joint Last.fm.

Tag Radio :

Funk polonaise ? Death pop ? Pensez à un style et nous

vous divertirons avec pendant des heures.

Commencez votre essai gratuit immédiatement à la

création votre compte et découvrez par vous-même ce que

cela fait d’avoir la musique du monde au bouts des doigts.

Les derniers prix et les informations complètes sont

disponibles sur www.last.fm/subscribe

■Utilisation du contrôle Scrobbling

Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner « Enable », puis appuyez

sur ENTER.

*Les services de webradio fournis par un tiers peuvent être

résiliés avec ou sans préavis.

Les services de webradio peuvent ne pas être accessibles dans

certaines zones.

Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm 1Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner « Sign in to your

account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.

Vous possédez déjà un compte Last.fm, vous pouvez

vous y connecter pour sélectionner « Sign in to your

account ». Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot

de passe dans l’écran clavier suivant.

■Utilisation de l’écran clavier

1. Utilisez q/w/e/r et le bouton ENTER pour

saisir votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de

passe.

2. Sélectionnez « OK ».

3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm your

entries » s’affiche.

4. Appuyez sur ENTER.

«Please wait... » apparait puis l’écran « Last.fm

Internet Radio » apparait.

Conseil

• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,

consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔page 1).

L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran

«Users ».

2Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner un menu puis

appuyez sur ENTER.

Search Station :

Vous pouvez rechercher une station par artiste, par tag

ou par nom d’utilisateur.

Top Artists Station :

Vous pouvez lire des pistes des artistes les mieux évalués.

Top Tags Station :

Vous pouvez lire des pistes des tags les mieux évalués.

Personal Station :

Vous pouvez lire des pistes de votre station

personnalisée (« Your Library », « Your

Neighbourhood » et « Your Recommendations »).

Profile :

Vous pouvez lire des pistes de « Recently Listened

Tracks », « Library » et « Neighbours ».

Account Info :

Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.

Sign Out :

Pour vous déconnecter de votre compte.

Utilisez

q/w

pour sélectionner une station, puis

appuyez sur

ENTER

pour démarrer la lecture.

La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.

■Eléments du menu

I Love this track :

L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le

serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture augmente.

Ban this track :

L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le

serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture diminue.

Add to My Favorites :

Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My Favorites.

Utilisation d’une webradio

Fr-6

Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio

1Si vous ne possédez pas de compte, créez-en un à

partir du site Web de Slacker (www.slacker.com) à

l’aide de votre ordinateur.

Si vous possédez déjà un compte Slacker,

sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis

appuyez sur ENTER.

L’écran clavier s’affiche. Pouvez saisir des

informations à partir de la télécommande ou des

touches sur l’appareil principal.

2Si les informations que vous avez saisies ne

comportent pas d’erreur, utilisezq/w/e/r pour

sélectionner « OK », puis appuyez sur ENTER.

L’écran de confirmation des informations du compte

s’affiche.

3Si vous ne possédez pas de compte, sélectionnez

« Access without Sign In », puis appuyez sur

ENTER pour utiliser une version restreinte du

service.

Veuillez noter que l’utilisation est restreinte.

Conseil

• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,

consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔page 1).

L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran

«Users ».

4Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner un élément du menu,

puis appuyez sur ENTER.

Pour vous déconnecter, utilisez q/w pour sélectionner

«Sign out » depuis cet écran, puis appuyez sur

ENTER.

5Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner une station, puis

appuyez sur ENTER ou 1 pour démarrer la

lecture depuis cette station.

L’écran de lecture apparaît.

6Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les touches sur

la télécommande.

Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 6

■Eléments du menu

Rate Song as Favorite :

Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur, et

d’augmenter la probabilité que le morceau soit lu de

nouveau.

Ban Song :

Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur, et

de diminuer la probabilité que le morceau soit lu de

nouveau.

Ban Artist :

Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur, et

de diminuer la probabilité que les morceaux de cet

artiste soient lus de nouveau.

Mark Favorite :

Permet d’ajouter la station en cours de lecture à vos

favoris.

Unmark Favorite :

Permet de supprimer la station en cours de lecture de

vos favoris.

Add song to Library :

Permet d’ajouter la piste en cours de lecture à votre

bibliothèque.

Delete song from Library :

Permet de supprimer la piste en cours de lecture de

votre bibliothèque.

Add to My Favorites :

Permet d’ajouter une station ou un morceau à la liste

My Favorites.

Uso de Internet Radio

Es-1

Uso de Internet Radio

Nota

• Los servicios disponibles pueden variar de una región a otra.

Procedimientos comunes en el menú

Internet Radio

1Pulse NET.

Aparecerá una lista de los servicios de red y se

iluminará el indicador NET. Si parpadea, verifique

que el cable Ethernet esté firmemente conectado al

receptor de AV.

2Seleccione el servicio deseado y pulse ENTER.

Aparecerá la página principal del servicio

seleccionado.

Uso de múltiples cuentas

El receptor de AV permite múltiples cuentas de usuario,

lo que quiere decir que se puede cambiar libremente

entre varios usuarios. Después de registrar las cuentas de

usuario, el acceso se realiza desde la pantalla “Users”.

Consejo

• Algunos de los servicios no permiten el uso de múltiples

cuentas de usuario.

• Puede guardar hasta 10 cuentas de usuario.

• Para cambiar entre cuentas debe antes cerrar sesión en la

cuenta actual y acceder de nuevo en la pantalla “Users”.

1Pulse MENU cuando aparezca la pantalla de

usuarios.

Aparecerán los siguientes elementos del menú:

Add new user:

Remove this user:

Puede guardar una nueva cuenta de usuario o borrar

una existente.

Pandora® Internet Radio –Primeros pasos

(solo EE.UU.) ............................................ 2

Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)...................3

Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio (solo

Norteamérica) ........................................... 4

Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio......................5

Uso de Slacker Personal Radio.................... 6

Uso de Internet Radio

Es-2

Pandora es un servicio de radio por Internet gratuito y

personalizado que reproduce la música que usted conoce y

le ayudará a descubrir música que le encantará.

PANDORA, el logotipo de PANDORA logo, y la imagen

corporativa de Pandora son marcas comerciales o marcas

comerciales registradas de Pandora Media, Inc. Uso con

permiso.

Pandora® Internet Radio

–Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.)

1Utilice q/w para seleccionar “I have a Pandora

Account” o “I’m new to Pandora” y luego pulse

ENTER.

Si no conoce Pandora seleccione “I’m new to

Pandora”. Verá un código de activación en la pantalla

del televisor. Tome nota de este código. Vaya a un

ordenador conectado a Internet y dirija el navegador a

www.pandora.com/onkyo

Introduzca su código de activación y siga las

instrucciones para crear su cuenta de Pandora y sus

emisoras de radio por Internet personalizadas de

Pandora. Puede crear sus propias emisoras

introduciendo sus canciones y artistas favoritos

cuando aparezca la solicitud correspondiente. Una vez

creada su cuenta y sus emisoras, puede regresar al

receptor Onkyo y pulsar Enter para empezar a

escuchar su radio por Internet personalizada de

Pandora.

Si ya dispone de una cuenta de Pandora, puede

añadirla al receptor Onkyo seleccionando “I have a

Pandora Account” e iniciando la sesión con su

dirección de correo electrónico y contraseña.

Consejo

• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso

de múltiples cuentas” (➔página 1). Se puede iniciar

sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.

2Utilice q/w para seleccionar la emisora en la lista de

emisoras y luego pulse ENTER.

Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de

reproducción.

Create a New Station:

Introduzca el nombre de una canción, artista o género;

Pandora creará una emisora de radio exclusiva para

usted basada en las cualidades musicales de esa

canción, de ese artista o de ese género.

■Elementos del menú

I like this song:

Si aprueba (pulgar arriba) una canción, Pandora

reproducirá más música parecida.

I don’t like this song:

Si no aprueba (pulgar abajo) la canción, Pandora

eliminará dicha canción de la emisora actual.

Why is this song playing?:

Descubra algunos de los atributos musicales que

Pandora utiliza para crear sus emisoras de radio

personalizadas.

Don’t play the song for a month:

Si se cansa de una canción, puede “silenciarla” de

modo que Pandora no la reproduzca durante un mes.

Create station from this artist:

Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este artista.

Delete this station:

Esto eliminará de forma permanente una emisora de

su cuenta de Pandora. Toda la información sobre sus

aprobaciones / desaprobaciones se perderá si quiere

volver a crear la emisora con la misma canción o

artista.

Create station from this song:

Crea una emisora de radio a partir de esta canción.

Rename this station:

Le permite renombrar la emisora de radio actual.

Bookmark this artist:

Pandora marcará su artista favorito para su perfil en

www.pandora.com.

Bookmark this song:

Pandora marcará la canción actual y le permitirá

comprarlas todas en Amazon o iTunes con un solo

paso.

Add to My Favorites:

Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.

Uso de Internet Radio

Es-3

Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)

1Utilice q/w para seleccionar “Sign in to your

account” y luego pulse ENTER.

Para utilizar Rhapsody, necesitará una cuenta. Si

todavía no tiene una, puede crear una nueva en

www.rhapsody.com/onkyo

Si ya tiene una cuenta Rhapsody, seleccione “Sign in

to your account” y pulse ENTER.

Escriba su nombre de usuario (normalmente el correo

electrónico) y contraseña en la pantalla de teclado que

aparece a continuación o en la configuración web.

■Utilización de la pantalla de teclado

1. Utilice q/w/e/r y ENTER para introducir su

nombre de usuario y su contraseña.

2. Seleccione “OK”.

3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla “Confirm

your entries”.

4. Pulse ENTER.

Consejo

• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso

de múltiples cuentas” (➔página 1). Se puede iniciar

sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.

2Utilice q/w para seleccionar el menú y luego pulse

ENTER.

Search:

Puede buscar música por artista, álbum o canción.

Music Guide:

Puede reproducir canciones por géneros, artistas

principales, álbumes principales o canciones

principales, novedades, selección del sitio.

Rhapsody Channels:

Escuche las emisoras de radio programadas por los

principales redactores de Rhapsody.

Playlists:

Reproduzca sus listas personales.

My Library:

Marque sus álbumes y canciones preferidas en el

catálogo de Rhapsody, usando Mi biblioteca.

Account Info:

Confirme los datos de su cuenta.

Sign Out:

Salga de su cuenta Rhapsody.

3Utilice q/w para seleccionar una emisora y luego

pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la reproducción.

Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de

reproducción.

Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del mando a

distancia.

Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,

6, RANDOM, REPEAT

Nota

• En Rhapsody Channels, algunos de los botones no

funcionan.

■Elementos del menú

Add track to My Library:

Marca las canciones que se están reproduciendo

actualmente.

Add album to My Library:

Marca los álbumes que se están reproduciendo

actualmente.

Add playlist to My Library:

Marca las listas de reproducción que se están

reproduciendo actualmente.

Add channel to My Channels:

Marca las emisoras de Rhapsody que se están

reproduciendo actualmente.

Add to My Favorites:

Añade una canción, emisora o lista de reproducción a

la lista Mis favoritos.

Consejo

• Puede eliminar las canciones, los álbumes y las emisoras de

Rhapsody marcados de Mi biblioteca.

Uso de Internet Radio

Es-4

Su receptor de AV Onkyo incluye una prueba gratuita de

SiriusXM Internet Radio. La pantalla “Account Info”

muestra los días que quedan de la prueba. Una vez que

termine el periodo de prueba, si desea seguir escuchando

este servicio, deberá contratarlo. para suscribirse vaya a

www.siriusxm.com/internetradio con su ordenador.

Cuando se suscriba, recibirá un nombre de usuario y una

contraseña que deberá introducir en el receptor de AV.

Para poder utilizar SiriusXM Internet Radio, el receptor de

AV debe estar conectado a internet. Para usar el mando a

distancia, siga este procedimiento:

Las suscripciones a SiriusXM Internet Radio se venden por

separado y se rigen por las condiciones de Sirius (consulte

www.sirius.com). Lea atentamente este acuerdo antes de

comprar la suscripción. Sirius, XM y todas las marcas y

logotipos relacionados son marcas comerciales de Sirius

XM Radio Inc. y sus filiales. Todos los derechos

reservados.

Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio (solo

Norteamérica) 1Utilice q/w para seleccionar “Sign In”, y luego

pulse ENTER.

Si ya tiene una cuenta SIRIUS, puede acceder

seleccionando “Sign In”. Escriba su nombre de

usuario y contraseña en la pantalla de teclado que

aparece a continuación o en la configuración web. Si

no sabe su nombre de usuario o la contraseña, llame a

Sirius XM al número (888) 539-7474 para solicitar

asistencia.

Consejo

• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso

de múltiples cuentas” (➔página 1). Se puede iniciar

sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.

■Utilización de la pantalla de teclado

1. Utilice q/w/e/r y ENTER para introducir su

nombre de usuario y su contraseña.

2. Seleccione “OK”.

3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla “Confirm

your entries”.

4. Pulse ENTER.

Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla

“SiriusXM Internet Radio”, que muestra la categoría

disponible para la selección.

2Utilice q/w para seleccionar la categoría y luego

pulse ENTER.

Aparece una pantalla con una lista de emisoras de la

categoría seleccionada.

3Utilice q/w para seleccionar la emisora deseada y

luego pulse ENTER.

Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción de la emisora

seleccionada y ahora usted podrá escuchar SiriusXM

Internet Radio.

Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del mando a

distancia.

Botones activados: 2, 3, 7, 6

■Elementos del menú

Add to My Favorites:

Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.

Uso de Internet Radio

Es-5

Last.fm es un servicio musical que sabe lo que le gusta...

Su nuevo receptor de AV Onkyo es muy inteligente. Si

tiene una cuenta gratuita de Last.fm, hará un seguimiento

de todas las canciones que acaba de escuchar. Cuando

visite el sitio web de Last.fm, podrá ver listas personales de

la música que ha disfrutado, compartirlas con sus amigos y

también ver lo que les gusta a ellos.

Con sus miles de biografías, críticas y una infinita variedad

de emisoras de radio personalizadas y sin publicidad,

Last.fm es una forma excelente de descubrir música. Cree

hoy mismo una cuenta gratuita de Last.fm en

www.last.fm/join

Si se suscribe podrá disfrutar de lo mejor de Last.fm Radio

sin anuncios en su receptor de AV Onkyo sin necesidad de

un ordenador.

Recommended Radio:

Descubra nuestras interesantes recomendaciones

personalizadas que se adaptan a sus gustos en cada

momento.

Artist Radio:

Escoja cualquier artista y podrá escuchar una emisora de

radio inspirada exclusivamente en su elección.

My Library:

Relájese y disfrute de selecciones de toda la música que ha

escuchado desde que se registró en Last.fm.

Tag Radio:

¿Polish funk? ¿Death pop? Piense en un estilo y podrá

escucharlo durante horas.

Pruébelo gratis ahora mismo. Cree una cuenta y verá por sí

mismo lo que significa tener toda la música del mundo al

alcance de sus oídos. Puede consultar los precios

actualizados y toda la información que desee en

www.last.fm/subscribe

■Uso del control de scrobbling

Utilice q/w para seleccionar “Enable”, y luego pulse

ENTER.

*Los servicios de radio por Internet suministrados por terceros

pueden cancelarse con o sin aviso previo.

Es posible que los servicios de radio por Internet no estén

disponibles en algunas zonas.

Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio 1Utilice q/w para seleccionar “Sign in to your

account”, y luego pulse ENTER.

Si ya tiene una cuenta de Last.fm, puede acceder a ella

para seleccionar “Sign in to your account”.

Introduzca su nombre de usuario y contraseña en la

siguiente pantalla de teclado.

■Utilización de la pantalla de teclado

1. Utilice q/w/e/r y ENTER para introducir su

nombre de usuario y su contraseña.

2. Seleccione “OK”.

3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla “Confirm

your entries”.

4. Pulse ENTER.

Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla

“Last.fm Internet Radio”.

Consejo

• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso

de múltiples cuentas” (➔página 1). Se puede iniciar

sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.

2Utilice q/w para seleccionar un menú y luego pulse

ENTER.

Search Station:

Puede buscar emisoras por artista, etiquetas o nombre

de usuario.

Top Artists Station:

Puede reproducir canciones de los artistas mejor

clasificados.

Top Tags Station:

Puede reproducir canciones con las etiquetas mejor

clasificadas.

Personal Station:

Puede reproducir pistas de una emisora personalizada

(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” y “Your

Recommendations”).

Profile:

Puede reproducir pistas de “Recently Listened

Tracks”, “Library” y “Neighbours”.

Account Info:

Confirme los datos de su cuenta.

Sign Out:

Se desconecta de su cuenta.

3Utilice q/w para seleccionar una emisora y luego

pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la reproducción.

Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de

reproducción.

■Elementos del menú

I Love this track:

Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el

servidor de Last.fm y aumenta la frecuencia con la que

se reproduce.

Ban this track:

Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el

servidor de Last.fm y se reduce la frecuencia con la

que se reproduce.

Add to My Favorites:

Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.

Uso de Internet Radio

Es-6

Uso de Slacker Personal Radio

1Si no tiene una cuenta, cree una en el sitio web de

Slacker (www.slacker.com) con su ordenador.

Si ya tiene una cuenta de Slacker, seleccione “Sign

in to your account” y pulse ENTER.

Aparecerá la pantalla de teclado. Puede introducir

información desde el mando a distancia o desde el

teclado de la unidad principal.

2Si no hay errores en la información que ha

introducido, utilice q/w/e/r para seleccionar

“OK” y luego pulse ENTER.

Aparecerá una pantalla de confirmación de la

información de la cuenta.

3Si no tiene una cuenta, seleccione “Access without

restringida del servicio.

Tenga en cuenta que el uso estará restringido.

Consejo

• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso

de múltiples cuentas” (➔página 1). Se puede iniciar

sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.

4Utilice q/w para seleccionar un menú y luego pulse

ENTER.

Para salir, utilice q/w para seleccionar “Sign out” en

esta pantalla y luego pulse ENTER.

5Utilice q/w para seleccionar una emisora y luego

pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la reproducción de

la emisora.

Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción.

6Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del

mando a distancia.

Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 6

■Elementos del menú

Rate Song as Favorite:

Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que sea

más probable que la canción se vuelva a reproducir.

Ban Song:

Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que sea

menos probable que la canción se vuelva a reproducir.

Ban Artist:

Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que sea

menos probable que las canciones de este artista se

vuelvan a reproducir.

Mark Favorite:

Añade la emisora que se está reproduciendo

actualmente a los favoritos.

Unmark Favorite:

Elimina la emisora que se está reproduciendo

actualmente de los favoritos.

Add song to Library:

Añade la canción que se está reproduciendo

actualmente a su biblioteca.

Delete song from Library:

Elimina la canción que se está reproduciendo

actualmente de la biblioteca.

Add to My Favorites:

Añade una emisora o canción a la lista Mis favoritos.

SN 29401189B

Y1203-2

* 2 9 4 0 1 1 8 9 B *

En-1

Using Internet Radio

Note

• Available services may vary depending on the region.

Common Procedures in Internet Radio

1Press NET.

A list of the network services appears, and the NET

indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet

cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.

2Select the desired service and press ENTER.

The top page of the selected service appears.

Using Multiple Accounts

The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts, which

means you can freely switch between several logins.

After registering user accounts, login is performed from

the “Users” screen.

Tip

• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user

accounts.

• You can store up to 10 user accounts.

• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the

current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.

1Press MENU while the Users screen is displayed.

The following menu items appear:

Add new user:

Remove this user:

You can either store a new user account, or delete

an existing one.

Using Last.fm Internet Radio........................ 2

Using Internet Radio

En-2

Last.fm is a music service that learns what you love...

Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you have a

free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all the songs

you’ve just played. When you visit the Last.fm website,

you can see personal charts of the music you’ve enjoyed,

share them with friends and see what they like, too.

With thousands of biographies, reviews and an endless

choice of personalised, ad-free radio stations, Last.fm is a

great way to discover music. Pick up your free Last.fm

account today at www.last.fm/join

UK and Germany only:

Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-free

Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without a

computer!

Recommended Radio:

Discover smart personalised recommendations that adapt

as your tastes change.

Artist Radio:

Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of music

inspired by your choice.

My Library:

Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music you’ve

heard since you joined Last.fm.

Tag Radio:

Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll

entertain you with it for hours.

Start your free trial straight away when you create your

account and see for yourself what it’s like to have the

world’s music at your fingertips. Latest prices and full

information are available at www.last.fm/subscribe

■Using scrobbling control

Use q/w to select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.

*Internet radio services provided by a third party may be

terminated with or without notice.

Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.

Using Last.fm Internet Radio 1Use q/w to select “Sign in to your account”, and

then press ENTER.

If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can sign

in to your account to select “Sign in to your

account”. Enter your user name and password in the

next keyboard screen.

■Using the keyboard screen

1. Use q/w/e/r and the ENTER to enter your user

name and password.

2. Select “OK”.

3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”

screen appears.

4. Press ENTER.

“Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm Internet

Radio” screen appears.

Tip

• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using

Multiple Accounts” (➔page 1). Login can be made from

the “Users” screen.

2Use q/w to select menu and then press ENTER.

Search Station:

You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User Name.

Top Artists Station:

You can play tracks of top-rated artists.

Top Tags Station:

You can play tracks of top-rated tags.

Personal Station:

You can play tracks from personalized station (“Your

Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and “Your

Recommendations”).

Profile:

You can play tracks from “Recently Listened

Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.

Account Info:

Confirm your account information.

Sign Out:

It signs out from your account.

3Use q/w to select a station, and press ENTER or 1

to start playback.

Playback starts and the playback screen appears.

Enabled buttons: 1, 2, 6

■Menu Items

I Love this track:

Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and

playback frequency increases.

Ban this track:

Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and

playback frequency reduces.

Add to My Favorites:

Adds a station to My Favorites list.

Internetradio verwenden

De-1

Internetradio verwenden

Anmerkung

• Die verfügbaren Dienste sind länderabhängig verschieden.

Allgemeine Verfahren bei den

Internetradio-Menüs

1Drücken Sie NET.

Es erscheint eine Liste der Netzwerkdienste und die

NET-Anzeige leuchtet. Wenn sie blinkt, überprüfen

Sie ob das Ethernet-Kabel fest im AV-Receiver

eingesteckt ist.

2Wählen Sie den gewünschten Service aus und

drücken Sie ENTER.

Die oberste Seite des ausgewählten Services erscheint.

Verwendung mehrerer Konten

Der AV-Receiver unterstützt mehrere Nutzerkonten, was

bedeutet, dass Sie frei zwischen mehreren Logins

umschalten können. Nach der Anmeldung der

Nutzerkonten wird das Login vom „Users“ Bildschirm

aus vorgenommen.

Tipp

• Einige dieser Dienstleistungen lassen keine mehrfachen

Nutzerkonten zu.

• Sie können bis zu 10 Nutzerkonten speichern.

• Um zwischen den Konten umzuschalten, müssen Sie sich

zuerst aus Ihrem aktuellen Konto ausloggen und sich dann

wieder auf dem „Users“ Bildschirm einloggen.

1Drücken Sie MENU während der Bildschirm des

Nutzers angezeigt wird.

Das folgende Menü erscheint:

Add new user:

Remove this user:

Sie können entweder ein neues Nutzerkonto

abspeichern oder ein bestehendes löschen.

Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio ..... 2

Internetradio verwenden

Last.fm ist ein Musikdienst, der sich Ihre

Lieblingsmusik merkt...

Ihr neuer Onkyo AV-Receiver ist äußerst clever. Wenn Sie ein

kostenloses Last.fm-Konto eingerichtet haben, werden darin alle

kürzlich abgespielten Titel gespeichert. Wenn Sie die Last.fm-

Website besuchen, können Sie Ihre persönlichen Charts der von

Ihnen abgespielten Musik anzeigen; teilen Sie diese mit Freunden

und sehen Sie auch, welche Musik Ihre Freunde mögen.

Mit tausenden von Biografien, Rezensionen und einer schier

endlosen Auswahl an persönlich angepassten, werbefreien

Radiosendern ist Last.fm eine großartige Gelegenheit, um

Musik zu entdecken. Holen Sie sich Ihr kostenloses Last.fm-

Konto noch heute unter www.last.fm/join

Nur für Großbritannien und Deutschland:

Holen Sie sich ein Abonnement und Sie können auch ohne

Computer die besten werbefreien Last.fm-Radiosender auf

Ihrem Onkyo AV-Receiver hören!

Recommended Radio:

Entdecken Sie smarte, persönlich angepasste Empfehlungen,

die sich mit Ihrem Musikgeschmack verändern.

Artist Radio:

Wählen Sie einen beliebigen Interpreten und wir spielen

für Sie einen ganzen Radiosender mit durch Ihre Wahl

inspirierter Musik.

My Library:

Lehnen Sie sich zurück und erfreuen Sie sich an einer

Auswahl aller Musik, die Sie seit Ihrer Mitgliedschaft bei

Last.fm gehört haben.

Tag Radio:

Polish Funk? Death Pop? Denken Sie an einen Musikstil

und wir unterhalten Sie stundenlang damit.

Starten Sie Ihr kostenloses Probeabo direkt wenn Sie Ihr

Konto erstellen und finden Sie selbst heraus wie es ist,

jederzeit die Musik der ganzen Welt abrufen zu können.

Die aktuellen Nutzungspreise und umfassende Infos sind

unter www.last.fm/subscribe erhältlich

■Scrobbling-Steuerung verwenden

Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Enable“ auszuwählen und dann

drücken Sie ENTER.

*Von Drittparteien zur Verfügung gestellte Internetradio-Dienste

können unter Umständen ohne Vorankündigung eingestellt

werden.

In bestimmten Gebieten sind Internetradio-Dienste eventuell

nicht verfügbar.

Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio 1Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Sign in to your account“

auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie ENTER.

Wenn Sie über einen bestehenden Last.fm Konto

verfügen, können Sie sich anmelden und „Sign in to

your account“ wählen. Geben Sie Ihre Ihre

Benutzernamen und das Kennwort in der folgenden

Tastaturanzeige ein.

■Verwendung der Tastaturanzeige

1. Verwenden Sie q/w/e/r und den ENTER, um

Ihren Nutzernamen und Passwort einzugeben.

2. Wählen Sie „OK“.

3. Drücken Sie ENTER. Die Anzeige „Confirm

your entries“ erscheint.

4. Drücken Sie ENTER.

„Please wait...“ wird angezeigt und danach erscheint

die „Last.fm Internet Radio“-Anzeige.

Tipp

• Falls Sie mehrere Nutzerkonten verwenden möchten,

schlagen Sie bitte unter „Verwendung mehrerer Konten“

nach (➔Seite 1). Das Login kann vom „Users“-

Bildschirm aus erfolgen.

2Verwenden Sie q/w, um das Menü auszuwählen

und dann drücken Sie ENTER.

Search Station:

Sie können einen Sender anhand Interpreten, Tags

oder Benutzernamen suchen.

Top Artists Station:

Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten Interpreten

wiedergeben.

Top Tags Station:

Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten Tags

wiedergeben.

Personal Station:

Sie können Titel aus einem persönlich angepassten

Sender wiedergeben („Your Library“, „Your

Neighbourhood“ und „Your Recommendations“).

Profile:

Sie können Titel aus „Recently Listened Tracks“,

„Library“ und „Neighbours“ wiedergeben.

Account Info:

Bestätigen Sie Ihre Kontoinformation.

Sign Out:

Zur Abmeldung aus Ihrem Konto.

3Verwenden Sie q/w, um einen Sender auszuwählen

und dann drücken Sie ENTER oder 1 , um die

Wiedergabe zu starten.

Die Wiedergabe wird gestartet und die

Wiedergabeanzeige erscheint.

Aktivierte Tasten: 1, 2, 6

■Menüsymbole

I Love this track:

Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-Server

gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der Wiedergabe wird

erhöht.

Ban this track:

Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-Server

gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der Wiedergabe wird

verringert.

Add to My Favorites:

Fügt einen Sender zu meiner My Favorites Liste

hinzu.

SN 29401229

Y1112-1

* 2 9 4 0 1 2 2 9 *

Remote Control Codes

1While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to which you want to assign a

code, press and hold down [DISPLAY] (about 3 seconds).

The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator lights.

On Integra products, button names are capitalized. For example, “Remote Mode”

button and “Display” button.

Notes:

• Remote control codes cannot be entered for [RECEIVER] and the multi zone button.

• Only TV remote control codes can be entered for [TV].

• Except for [RECEIVER], [TV], and the multi zone button, remote control codes from any

category can be assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However, these buttons also work

as input selector buttons, so choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input

to which you connect your component. For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD

input, choose [TV/CD] when entering its remote control code.

2Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit remote control

code.

The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator flashes twice.

If the remote control code is not entered successfully, the REMOTE MODE

button/Remote indicator will flash once slowly.

Notes:

• The flashing element of the remote controller will differ according to your AV receiver’s model.

• The remote controller is preconfigured with remote controller presets of different components.

By entering a code from the Remote Control Code list, you can activate the relevant preset for

that component.

• When there are multiple codes related to one manufacturer, try and enter them one-by-one until

it matches your component.

• Depending on the model and year of your component, compatibility is not guaranteed.

• With some models, the remote controller may not not work or its compatibility may be limited

to part of the component’s functionality.

• Besides, it is not possible to add new codes to the existing remote controller presets.

• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time of printing, they are subject to

change by the manufacturer.

Remote Control Codes

Codes de télécommande Códigos de control remoto

1Tout en maintenant enfoncé le bouton REMOTE MODE auquel vous souhaitez

associer un code, pressez et maintenez enfoncé le bouton [DISPLAY] (pendant

environ 3 secondes).

Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote s’allume.

Les noms de boutons sont en manjuscules sur les produits Integra. Par exemple, le

bouton « Remote Mode » et le bouton « Display ».

Remarques :

• Les codes de télécommande ne peuvent pas être entrés pour [RECEIVER] et le bouton multi

zone.

• Seul les code de télécommande de téléviseurs peuvent être entrés pour [TV].

• À l’exception de [RECEIVER], [TV] et du bouton multi zone, vous pouvez affecter des codes

de télécommande de n’importe quelle catégorie pour les boutons REMOTE MODE. Cependant,

ces boutons font également office de bouton de sélecteur d’entrée : par conséquent, choisissez

un bouton REMOTE MODE correspondant à l’entrée à laquelle vous souhaitez raccorder votre

appareil. Par exemple, si vous raccordez votre lecteur CD à l’entrée CD, choisissez [TV/CD]

lorsque vous saisissez le code de télécommande.

2Vous disposez de 30 secondes pour saisir le code de télécommande à cinq chiffres

à l’aide des boutons numérotés.

Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote clignote deux fois.

Si le code de télécommande n’a pas été saisi correctement le bouton REMOTE

MODE/l’indicateur Remote ne clignote qu’une seule fois.

Remarques :

• L’élément clignotant de la télécommande différera selon le modèle de votre ampli-tuner AV.

• La télécommande est préconfigurée avec des préréglages de télécommande de différents

appareils. En entrant un code de la liste des codes de télécommandes, vous pouvez activer le

préréglage approprié pour cet appreil.

• Quand il y a de multiples codes liés à un fabricant, essayez-les et entrez-les un par un jusqu’à ce

que cela corresponde à votre appareil.

• Selon le modèle et l’année de votre appareil, la compatibilité n’est pas garantie.

• Avec certains modèles, la télécommande peut ne pas fonctionner ou sa compatibilité peut être

limitée à une partie de la fonctionnalité de l’appareil.

• En outre, il n’est pas possible d’ajouter de nouveaux codes aux préréglages de télécommande

existants.

• Bien que les codes de télécommande fournis soient corrects au moment de l’impression de la

liste, ils sont susceptibles d’être modifiés par le fabricant.

1Manteniendo pulsado el botón REMOTE MODE para el cual desea introducir un

código, pulse y mantenga presionado el botón [DISPLAY] (aproximadamente 3

segundos).

Se iluminará el botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote.

En los productos Integra, los nombres de los botones aparecen con mayúsculas. Por

ejemplo, el botón “Remote Mode” y el botón “Display”.

Notas:

• No podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia para [RECEIVER] y el botón multizona.

• Únicamente podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia de televisor para el botón [TV].

• Con la excepción de [RECEIVER], [TV] y el botón multizona, se pueden asignar códigos de

mando a distancia de cualquier categoría a los botones de REMOTE MODE. No obstante, estos

botones también pueden funcionar como botones de selector de entrada; por tanto, seleccione

un botón REMOTE MODE que se corresponda con la entrada a la cual está conectado el

componente. Por ejemplo, si conecta un reproductor de CD a la entrada de CD, seleccione

[TV/CD] cuando introduzca su código de mando a distancia.

2Antes de que transcurran 30 segundos, utilice los botones numéricos para

introducir el código de mando a distancia de 5 dígitos.

El botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará dos veces.

Si el código de mando a distancia no se introduce correctamente, el botón REMOTE

MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará una vez despacio.

Notas:

• El parpadeo del mando distancia será distinto según el modelo de receptor de AV.

• El mando a distancia está preconfigurado con los ajustes predeterminados de los distintos

componentes. Al introducir un código de la lista de códigos del mando a distancia se puede

activar el ajuste predeterminado de ese componente.

• Cuando hay múltiples códigos relacionados con un fabricante, pruebe a introducirlos uno a uno

hasta que coincida con su componente.

• Dependiendo del modelo y el año de su componente, la compatibilidad no está garantizada.

• Con algunos modelos, es posible que el mando a distancia no funcione o que su compatibilidad

esté limitada a una parte de las funciones del componente.

• Además, no es posible añadir nuevos códigos a los ajustes predeterminados existentes del

mando a distancia.

• Los códigos de mando a distancia suministrados son correctos en el momento de la impresión,

pero el fabricante puede realizar cambios.

Remote Control Codes

Codici del telecomando Fernbedienungscodes

1Tenendo premuto il tasto REMOTE MODE al quale si desidera assegnare il

codice, premere e tenere premuto [DISPLAY] (per circa 3 secondi).

Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote si accende.

Sui prodotti Integra, i nomi dei tasti sono scritti con l'iniziale maiuscola. Ad esempio,

tasto “Remote Mode” e tasto “Display”.

Note:

• I codici di controllo del telecomando non possono essere inseriti per [RECEIVER] e i tasti multi

zona.

• Per [TV] è possibile immettere solo codici telecomando del televisore.

• Tranne che per [RECEIVER], [TV], e per il tasto multi zona, è possibile assegnare codici di

controllo di ogni categoria per i tasti REMOTE MODE. Tuttavia, tali tasti fungono anche da

tasti del selettore d'ingresso, quindi scegliere un tasto REMOTE MODE che corrisponda

all'ingresso al quale viene collegato il dispositivo. Per esempio, se si collega il lettore CD

all'ingresso CD, scegliere il [TV/CD] quando si immette il relativo codice telecomando.

2Entro 30 secondi utilizzare i tasti numerici per inserire il codice telecomando a 5

cifre.

Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia due volte.

Se il codice telecomando non viene inserito correttamente, il tasto REMOTE

MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia lentamente una volta.

Note:

• L'elemento lampeggiante del telecomando varia a seconda del modello del ricevitore AV.

• Il telecomando è preconfigurato con preselezioni per diversi apparecchi. Inserendo un codice

dall'elenco dei codici telecomando, è possibile attivare la relativa preselezione per tale

apparecchio.

• Se sono presenti più codici relativi allo stesso produttore, provare a inserirli uno a uno finché

non si arrivi al codice corrispondente dell'apparecchio.

• A seconda del modello e dell'anno dell'apparecchio, la compatibilità non è garantita.

• Con alcuni modelli, il telecomando può non funzionare o la sua compatibilità può essere limitata

a una parte della funzionalità dell'apparecchio.

• Inoltre, non è possibile aggiungere nuovi codici alle preselezioni esistenti del telecomando.

• I codici telecomando specificati sono validi alla data della stampa del presente documento, ma

sono soggetti a variazioni da parte del produttore.

1Halten Sie die REMOTE MODE-Taste gedruckt, fur die Sie den Code eingeben

mochten, und drucken Sie (ca. 3 Sekunden lang) die [DISPLAY]-Taste.

Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige leuchtet.

Bei den Integra-Produkten werden die Namen der Tasten groß geschrieben. Zum

Beispiel „Remote Mode“ (Fernbedienungsmodus)-Taste und „Display“-Taste.

Hinweise:

• Der Fernbedienungscode kann nicht [RECEIVER] und der Multi-Zonen-Taste zugeordnet

werden.

• Der Taste [TV] können nur Fernbedienungscodes für einen Fernseher zugeordnet werden.

• Abgesehen von [RECEIVER], [TV] und der Multi-Zone-Taste, können die

Fernbedienungscodes jeder Kategorie den REMOTE MODE-Tasten zugewiesen werden.

Allerdings dienen diese Tasten auch als Quellenwahltasten. Wählen Sie also nach Möglichkeit

eine REMOTE MODE-Taste, die dem Eingang zugeordnet ist, an den Sie die betreffende Quelle

angeschlossen haben. Wenn Sie z.B. einen CD-Player an den CD-Eingang anschließen, sollten

Sie [TV/CD] wenn Sie den Fernbedienungscode eingeben.

2Geben Sie mit den Zifferntasten innerhalb von 30 Sekunden den 5-stelligen

Herstellercode ein.

Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige blinkt zwei Mal.

Wenn der Fernbedienungscode nicht ordnungsgemäß eingegeben wurde, blinkt die

REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige einmal langsam.

Hinweise:

• Das blinkende Element auf der Fernbedienung unterscheidet sich je nach AV-Receiver-Modell.

• Die Fernbedienung ist mit den Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung der verschiedenen

Komponenten vorkonfiguriert. Indem ein Code aus der Liste der Fernbedienungscodes

eingegeben wird, können Sie die entsprechende Voreinstellung für die Komponente aktivieren.

• Wenn es mehrere Codes gibt, die sich auf einen Hersteller beziehen, versuchen Sie sie einzeln

einzugeben, bis einer mit Ihrer Komponente übereinstimmt.

• Dies hängt vom Modell und Herstellungsjahr Ihrer Komponente ab und die Kompatibilität ist

nicht garantiert.

• Es kann sein, dass bei einigen Modellen die Fernbedienung nicht funktioniert oder ihre

Kompatibilität sich auf nur auf Teile der Funktionalität der Komponente beschränkt.

• Abgesehen davon ist es nicht möglich, den bestehenden Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung

neue Codes hinzuzufügen.

• Obwohl die angegebenen Fernbedienungscodes dem Stand bei Drucklegung entsprechen, sind

Änderungen durch den Hersteller vorbehalten.

Remote Control Codes

Afstandsbedieningscodes Fjärrstyrningskoder

1Houd terwijl u de REMOTE MODE toets ingedrukt houdt waarvoor u een code

wilt toewijzen de [DISPLAY] toets ingedrukt (ongeveer 3 seconden).

De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje

afstandsbediening gaat branden.

Op producten van Integra staan de namen van de toetesn in hoofdletters. Bijvoorbeeld,

de toetsen “Remote Mode” en “Display”.

Opmerkingen:

• Er kunnen geen afstandsbedieningscodes worden ingevoerd voor [RECEIVER] en de multi

zone-toets.

• Alleen TV afstandsbedieningscodes kunnen worden ingevoerd voor [TV].

• Behalve voor [RECEIVER], [TV] en de multi zone-toets, kunnen afstandsbedieningscodes

vanuit elke categorie worden toegewezen aan de REMOTE MODE toetsen. Deze toetsen

werken overigens ook als ingangsselectortoetsen, kies dus een REMOTE MODE toets die

overeenkomt met de ingang waarop u uw component wilt aansluiten. Kies indien u bijvoorbeeld

uw CD-speler aansluit op de CD-ingang de [TV/CD] toets bij het invoeren van de

afstandsbedieningscode.

2Gebruik binnen 30 seconden de cijfertoetsen om de 5-cijferige

afstandsbedieningscode in te voeren.

De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje

afstandsbediening knippert tweemaal.

Indien de afstandsbedieningscode niet met succes wordt ingevoerd, zal de toets

REMOTE MODE/Remote-indicator eenmaal traag knipperen.

Opmerkingen:

• Het knippergedeelte van de afstandsbediening zal verschillen ten opzichte van het model van

uw AV-receiver.

• De afstandsbediening is voorgeprogrammeerd met voorkeuzetoetsen van verschillende

componenten. Door het invullen van een code uit de afstandsbediening codelijst kunt u de

voorkeuzetoets voor die component activeren.

• Wanneer er meerdere codes gerelateerd zijn aan één fabrikant, probeer deze dan een voor een

totdat de juiste code overeenkomt met uw component.

• Afhankelijk van het model en het bouwjaar van uw component is de compatibiliteit niet

gegarandeerd.

• Bij sommige modellen werkt de afstandsbediening mogelijk niet of is de compatibiliteit ervan

beperkt tot een deel van de functionaliteit van de component.

•

Daarnaast is het niet mogelijk om nieuwe codes aan de bestaande voorkeuzetoetsen van de

afstandsbediening toe te voegen.

• Hoewel de gegeven afstandsbedieningscodes correct zijn op het moment van afdrukken, kunnen

deze door de fabrikant gewijzigd worden.

1Håll ned knappen för det REMOTE MODE som du vill tilldela en kod samtidigt

som du trycker och håller ned [DISPLAY] (i cirka 3 sekunder).

REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa.

På Integra-produkter, är knappnamnens begynnelsebokstav en versal. Till exempel,

”Fjärrläge”-knapp och ”Display”-knapp.

Anmärkningar:

• Fjärrkontrollkoder kan inte anges för knapparna [RECEIVER] och flerzonsknappen.

• Endast fjärrkontrollkoder för tv kan anges för [TV].

• Förutom [RECEIVER], [TV] och flerzonsknappen, kan fjärrkontrollkoder för vilken som helst

kategori tilldelas för knapparna REMOTE MODE. Dessa knappar fungerar dock även som

ingångväljarknappar, så använd en knapp för REMOTE MODE som motsvarar ingången som

du ansluter utrustningen till. Till exempel, om du ansluter din CD-spelare till CD-ingången ska

du välja [TV/CD] när du anger dess fjärrkontrollkod.

2Använd sifferknapparna för att ange den femsiffriga koden inom 30 sekunder.

REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa blinkar två gånger.

Om fjärrkontrollkoden inte ställdes in, blinkar REMOTE MODE-

knappen/fjärrindikatorn långsamt en gång.

Anmärkningar:

• Det blinkande elementet på fjärrkontrollen skiljer sig åt beroende på din modell av AV-receiver.

• Fjärrkontrollen har förkonfigurerats med förvalda kanaler på fjärrkontrollen för olika

komponenter. Genom att ange en kod från fjärrkontrollkodlistan, kan du aktivera relevanta

förvalda kanaler för den utrustningen.

• När det finns flera olika koder för en tillverkare ska du försöka att ange dem en och en tills de

stämmer överens med din utrustning.

• Beroende på utrustningens modell och årgång, går det inte att garantera kompatibilitet.

• På vissa modeller kan det hända att fjärrkontrollen inte fungerar eller så kan dess kompatibilitet

vara begränsad till en del av utrustningens funktion.

• Dessutom går det inte att lägga till nya koder till fjärrkontrollens existerande förvalda kanaler.

• Även om erhållna fjärrkontrollkoder är korrekta vid tryckningen, kan de ändras av tillverkaren.

Remote Control Codes

遙控代碼遥控代码

1在按住想指定編碼的 REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕時，同時按住

[DISPLAY] （顯示）（約 3 秒）。

REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈亮起。

在 Integra 系列產品上，按鈕名稱為大寫。例如，「Remote Mode」（遙控模式）

按鈕和「Display」（顯示）按鈕。

注意：

•[RECEIER] （接收機）和多區域按鈕不能輸入遙控編碼。

•您只能為 [TV] （電視）輸入電視遙控編碼。

•除 [RECEIVER] （接收機）、[TV] （電視）和多區域按鈕外，您可針對 REMOTE MODE

（遙控模式）按鈕指定任何類別的遙控編碼。但是，這些按鈕仍可用作為輸入選擇器按

鈕，因此，請選擇與您設備所連接輸入接口對應的 REMOTE MODE 按鈕。例如，如果

要將 CD 播放機連接到 CD 輸入源上，則需在輸入遙控編碼時選擇 [TV/CD]。

2在 30 秒內，使用數字按鈕輸入 5 位數的遙控編碼。

REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈閃爍兩次。

如果無法成功輸入遙控編碼，REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈

會慢慢地閃爍一次。

注意：

•視您的 AV 接收機型號而定，遙控器的閃爍元件會有不同。

•遙控器已預先設定有不同設備的遙控器預設值。透過輸入遙控編碼清單中的編碼，您

可啟用該設備的相關預設值。

•當有多個編碼與單一製造商相關時，請嘗試一個接著一個輸入，直到與您的設備對應

為止。

•視設備的型號和年份而定，並不保證與本公司產品相容。

•在某些型號上，遙控器可能無法作用，或是其相容性限於部份設備功能。

•除此之外，您無法新增編碼至現有的遙控器預設值。

•雖然所提供之遙控編碼在本文件列印時為正確，製造商仍可能會對其作出修改。

1按住想指定编码的 REMOTE MODE （遥控模式）按钮的同时，按住 [DISPLAY

（显示）] （大约 3 秒钟）。

REMOTE MODE （遥控模式）按钮 / 遥控指示灯亮起。

Integra 产品上的按钮名称单词首字母大写。例如，“Remote Mode （遥控模

式）”按钮和 “Display （显示）”按钮。

注意：

•[RECEIVER （接收机）] 和多区域按钮不能输入遥控编码。

•只能为 [TV （电视）] 输入电视遥控编码。

•

除 [RECEIVER （接收机）]、[TV （电视）] 和多区域按钮外，不能为 REMOTE MODE （遥

控模式）按钮指定任何类别的遥控编码。但是，这些按钮仍可用作输入选择器按钮，因

此，选择与设备所要连接的输入端对应的 REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮。例如，如果

要将 CD 播放机连接到 CD 输入端，应在输入遥控编码时选择 [TV/CD （电视 /CD）]。

2在 30 秒内，使用数字按钮输入 5 位数的遥控编码。

REMOTE MODE （遥控模式）按钮 / 遥控指示灯闪烁两次。

如果不能顺利输入遥控编码，REMOTE MODE （遥控模式）按钮 / 遥控指示灯会

缓慢闪烁一次。

注意：

•根据 AV 接收机产品类型的不同，遥控器闪烁元素将会不同。

•遥控器采用不同设备的遥控器预设进行预配置。通过从遥控器编码列表输入编码，便

可激活相应设备的相关预设。

•单个制造商关联多个编码时，请尝试逐个输入，直至符合当前设备。

•根据设备的产品类型和年份的不同，无法保证兼容性。

•对于某些产品类型，遥控器可能无法工作或其兼容性可能受到部分设备功能性的限制。

•此外，可能无法将新的编码追加到现有的遥控器预设。

•尽管付印时所提供的遥控编码是正确的，但制造商会随时更改。

Remote Control Codes

Dedicated Onkyo Receiver

Default 62503

Zone 2 62506

Zone 3 62507

Cable Set Top Box

ADB 02254, 02769

Aon 02769

Arris 02187

AT&T 00858

Bright House 01376, 01877

BT Vision 02294

Cable & Wireless 01068

Cable One 01376, 01877

Cablecom 01582

Cablevision 01376, 01877

Charter 01376, 01877, 02187

Cisco 01877, 00858, 01982,

02345, 02378

Com Hem 00817, 00660, 01666,

02015, 02447

Comcast 01376, 01877, 01982,

02187

Cox 01376, 01877

Daeryung 01877

Digeo 02187

DX Antenna 01500

France Telecom 00817

Freebox 01482

Fujitsu 01497

Humax 00660, 02142, 02447,

03051, 03053

Insight 01376, 01877

J:COM 03051, 03053

Knology 01877

Kreatel 01385

Macab 00817

Mediacom 01376, 01877

mio TV 02802

Motorola 01376, 00858, 01562,

01982, 01998, 02378

Moxi 02187

NEC 01496

Neuf TV 03107

Noos 00817

NTL 01068, 01060

Numericable 02767

Ono 01068, 01562

Optus 01060

Orange 00817

Pace 01376, 01877, 01068,

01060, 01982

Panasonic 01488, 01982

Philips 00817, 01582, 02294,

02767

Pioneer 01877, 01500

RCN 01376

Rogers 01877

Sagem 00817

Samsung 01877, 01060, 01666,

02015, 02774

Scientific Atlanta 01877, 00858, 01982,

02345

SFR 03107

Shaw 01376

SingTel 01998, 02802

Sony 01460

Stofa 02015

Suddenlink 01376, 01877

Sumitomo 01500

Telewest 01068

TeliaSonera 01385

Telus 02345

Thomson 01582, 01982, 02769

Time Warner 01376, 01877, 02187

Cable Set Top Box

Toshiba 01509

UPC 01582

Verizon 02378

Videotron 01877

Virgin Media 01068, 01060

Visiopass 00817

VTR 01376

WideOpenWest 01877

Ziggo 00660, 01666, 02015,

02142, 02447, 02774

Cable/PVR Combination

Arris 02187

Bright House 01376, 01877

Cable One 01376, 01877

Cablevision 01376, 01877

Charter 01376, 01877, 02187

Cisco 01877, 01982

Comcast 01376, 01877, 01982,

02187

Cox 01376, 01877

Digeo 02187

Freebox 01482

Humax 02142, 03051, 03053

Insight 01376, 01877

J:COM 03051, 03053

Knology 01877

Mediacom 01376, 01877

Motorola 01376

Moxi 02187

Numericable 02767

Pace 01877

Panasonic 01982

Philips 01582, 02767

Pioneer 01877

Rogers 01877

Cable Set Top Box

Samsung 01877

Scientific Atlanta 01877, 01982

Shaw 01376

Suddenlink 01376, 01877

Thomson 01582

Time Warner 01376, 01877, 02187

UPC 01582

Videotron 01877

VTR 01376

WideOpenWest 01877

Ziggo 02142

IPTV

ADB 02254, 02769

Aon 02769

AT&T 00858

BT Vision 02294

Canal+ 02657

Cisco 00858, 02345, 02378

Kreatel 01385

mio TV 02802

Motorola 01376, 00858, 01998,

02378

Neuf TV 03107

Pace 02657

Scientific Atlanta 00858, 02345

SFR 03107

SingTel 01998, 02802

TeliaSonera 01385

Telus 02345

Thomson 02769

Verizon 02378

IPTV/PVR Combination

ADB 02769

Aon 02769

Cable/PVR Combination

Remote Control Codes

AT&T 00858

BT Vision 02294

Cisco 00858, 02345, 02378

Kreatel 01385

Motorola 00858, 02378

Neuf TV 03107

Philips 02294

Scientific Atlanta 00858

SFR 03107

Verizon 02378

Advantage 70032

AH! 70157

Aiwa 70157

Arcam 70157

Atoll Electronique 70157

Audio Research 70157

Audiolab 70157

Audiomeca 70157

Audioton 70157

AVI 70157

Balanced Audio

Technology

70157

Cairn 70157

California Audio Labs 70029, 70303

Cambridge 70157

Cambridge Audio 70157

Carver 70157

CCE 70157

Cyrus 70157

Denon 70626, 70766

DKK 70000

DMX Electronics 70157

Dynaco 70157

Genexxa 70000, 70032

IPTV/PVR Combination

Goldmund 70157

Grundig 70157

Harman/Kardon 70157

Hitachi 70032

Integra 71817, 70101

JVC 70072

Kenwood 70626, 70157, 70036

Krell 70157

Linn 70157

Loewe 70157

Magnavox 70157

Marantz 70626, 70029, 70157

Matsui 70157

MCS 70029

Memorex 70032

Meridian 70157

Micromega 70157

Miro 70000

Mission 70157

Myryad 70157

NAD 70000, 70721

Naim 70157

NSM 70157

Onkyo 71817

Optimus 70000, 70032

Panasonic 70029, 70303

Philips 70626, 70157

Pioneer 70032, 70101

Polk Audio 70157

Primare 70157

Proton 70157

QED 70157

Quad 70157

Quasar 70029

Radiola 70157

RCA 70032

Restek 70157

Revox 70157

Rotel 70157

SAE 70157

Sansui 70157

SAST 70157

Siemens 70157

Silsonic 70036

Simaudio 70157

Sonic Frontiers 70157

Sony 70490, 70000

Sylvania 70157

TAG McLaren 70157

Tandy 70032

Technics 70029, 70303

Thorens 70157

Thule Audio 70157

Traxdata 70626

Universum 70157

Victor 70072

Wards 70000, 70032, 70157

Yamaha 70490, 70032, 70036

Zonda 70157

CD-R

Denon 70626, 70766

JVC 70072

Kenwood 70626

Marantz 70626

Onkyo 71323

Philips 70626

Sony 70000

Onkyo 70868

Sony 70490, 70000

Yamaha 70490

Cassette Deck

Aiwa 40029

Arcam 40076

Audiolab 40029

Carver 40029

Denon 40076

Grundig 40029

Harman/Kardon 40029

Inkel 40070

JVC 40244

Kenwood 40070

Magnavox 40029

Marantz 40029

Myryad 40029

Onkyo 42157

Optimus 40027

Philips 40029

Pioneer 40027

Polk Audio 40029

Radiola 40029

RCA 40027

Revox 40029

Sansui 40029

Sony 40243

Thorens 40029

Victor 40244

Wards 40027, 40029

Yamaha 40097

Accessory

Apple 81115

Jamo 82228

Logitech 82182

Onkyo 82990, 81993, 82351

Remote Control Codes

Polk Audio 82228

Video - Accessory

ADB 02254, 02769

Aon 02769

Apple 02615

AT&T 00858

BT Vision 02294

Canal+ 02657

Cisco 00858, 02345, 02378

Kreatel 01385

mio TV 02802

Motorola 01376, 00858, 01998,

02378

Neuf TV 03107

Pace 02657

Philips 02294

Scientific Atlanta 00858, 02345

SFR 03107

SingTel 01998, 02802

TeliaSonera 01385

Telus 02345

Thomson 02769

Verizon 02378

Receiver

Onkyo 52503

Satellite Set Top Box

@sat 01300

@Sky 01334

Acoustic Solutions 01284

ADB 00642, 00887, 01259

Akura 01626

Alba 01284

Allvision 01334

Accessory

Amstrad 00847, 01175, 01662,

01693

Ansonic 02418

Arnion 01300

ASCI 01334

AssCom 00853

Astro 00173, 01100

Atlanta 02418

Atsat 01300

AtSky 01334

Audiola 02418

Aurora 00879, 00642, 01433

Austar 00879, 00642, 01259

Avanit 01631

Awa 02418

Axil 01413, 01457, 02418

Axitronic 01626

Balmet 01457

Bell ExpressVu 00775

Belson 02418

Big Sat 01457

Black Diamond 01284

Blaupunkt 00173

Boshmann 01413, 01631

Boston 01251

Boxer 01458

British Sky

Broadcasting

00847, 01175, 01662

BskyB 00847, 01175, 01662

Bush 01284, 01291, 01626,

01645

Canal Digital 00853, 01334

Canal Satellite 00853, 02657

Canal+ 00853, 02657

CanalSat 00853, 02657

Centrex 01457

Satellite Set Top Box

CGV 01413, 01567

Chess 01334, 01626

CityCom 01176

Clatronic 01413

Clayton 01626

Com Hem 01176, 01915

Comag 01413

Comsat 01413

Coship 01457

Crown 01284

CS 01631

Cyfra+ 01409

Cyfrowy Polsat 00853, 02527

D-box 00723, 01114

Dantax 01626

Denver 02418

Dgtec 01242, 01631, 02418

Dick Smith

Electronics

02418

Digi Raum Electronics 01176

Digiality 01334

Digifusion 01645

Digihome 01284

DigiLogic 01284

DigiQuest 01300, 01457, 01631

Digisky 01457

DigitalBox 01100, 01631

Digiwave 01631

DirecTV 01377, 00099

Dish Network 00775

Dishpro 00775

DishTV 01300

DRE 01176

Dream Multimedia 01237

DSE 02280, 02418

DSTV 00879, 00642, 01433

Satellite Set Top Box

Durabrand 01284

Echostar 00775, 00853, 01323,

01409, 02527

Eco-Star 01413

Edision 01631

Elap 01413, 01567

Elbe 02418

Energy Sistem 01631, 02418

Engel 01251

EuroLine 01251

Europhon 01334

Europsat 01413, 01611

Expressvu 00775

Fagor 01611

Ferguson 01291

Finlux 01626

Fly Com 01457

FMD 01413, 01457

Foxtel 00879, 01176, 01356

Freesat 02408

Fuba 00173, 01251

Galaxis 00853, 00879

General Satellite 01176

Globo 01251, 01334, 01626

GOI 00775

Gold Box 00853

Gold Vision 01631

GoldMaster 01334

Goodmans 01284, 01291

Gradiente 00099, 00887

Grandin 01626

Grocos 01409, 01457

Grundig 00847, 00853, 00173,

00879, 01284, 01291

Haier 02418

Hallo 01626

Satellite Set Top Box

Remote Control Codes

Hama 01567

Hanseatic 01100

Hirschmann 00173

Hitachi 01284

Hornet 01300

HTS 00775

Humax 01377, 01176, 01427,

01675, 01808, 01882,

01915, 02144, 02408,

02616

ID Digital 01176

ID Sat 01334

ILLUSION sat 01631

Imperial 01195, 01334

Indovision 00887

iNETBOX 01237

Inno Hit 01626

Innova 00099

inVion 02418

iotronic 01413

ISkyB 00887

ITT 02418

ITT Nokia 00723

Jadeworld 00642

Jaeger 01334

JVC 00775

KabelBW 01195, 01882, 01915

Kaon 01300

Kathrein 00173, 01561, 01567

Kenwood 00853

Koenig 01631

Kreiling 01626

Kreiselmeyer 00173

L&S Electronic 01334

LaSAT 00173

Lava 01631

Satellite Set Top Box

Leiko 01626

Lemon 01334

Lenoxx 01611

Linsar 01284

Listo 01626

Lodos 01284

Logik 01284

Macab 00853

Manhattan 01300

Maspro 00173

Matsui 00173, 01284, 01626

Maximum 01334

Mediabox 00853

Mediacom 01206

MediaSat 00853

Medion 01334, 01626

MegaSat 01631

Metronic 01334, 01413, 01631,

02418

Metz 00173

Moserbaer 01251

Movistar 02527, 02761

Multichoice 00879, 00642, 01433,

02059, 02060

MySky 01356, 01693, 01850

NEOTION 01334

Netsat 00099, 00887

Nikko 00723

Nokia 00853, 00723, 01223

Nordmende 01611

NPG 01631

Onn 01284

Optex 01413, 01611, 01626

Optus 00879, 01356

Orbis 01334

Orbitech 01100, 01195

Satellite Set Top Box

Pace 00847, 00853, 00887,

01175, 01323, 01356,

01423, 01662, 01693,

01850, 02059, 02060,

02211, 02657

Pacific 01284

Palcom 01409, 01611

Panasat 00879, 01433

Panasonic 00847, 01304, 01404,

03099

Panda 00173

Pass 01567

peeKTon 01457, 02418

Philips 00099, 00853, 00173,

01114, 00887, 00133,

02211

Phoenix 02418

Pino 01334

Pioneer 00853, 01308

PMB 01611

Premiere 00723

Pro Basic 00853

Proline 01284

QNS 01404

RCA 01291

Regal 01251

Roadstar 00853

Rollmaster 01413

Rownsonic 01567

SAB 01251, 01300, 01631

Sagem 01114

Saivod 02418

Samsung 01377, 00853, 01175,

01206, 01458, 01662,

02986

Sansui 01251

Sanyo 01626

Sat Control 01300

Satellite Set Top Box

Sat Industrie 01611

SAT+ 01409

Satplus 01100

SatyCon 01631

Schaub Lorenz 02418

Schneider 01206, 01251

Schwaiger 01334, 01457, 01631

Sedea Electronique 01206, 01626

SEG 01251, 01284, 01626

Servimat 01611

ServiSat 01251

Shark 01631

Sherwood 01409

Siemens 00173, 01334, 01626,

02418

Sigmatek 02418

SKY 00099, 00847, 00887,

01175, 01662, 01693,

01850, 02754

SKY Brazil 00887

SKY Deutschland 02754

SKY Italia 00853, 01693, 01850

SKY New Zealand 02211

SKY PerfecTV! 02299, 02616, 03099

Sky XL 01251

Sky+ 01175, 01662

Skymaster 01334, 01409, 01567,

01611

Skymax 01413

Skyplus 01175, 01334

SkySat 01100

Skyvision 01334

SM Electronic 01409

Smart 01404, 01413, 01631

SmartVision 01457

Sony 00847, 00853, 01558,

02299

Satellite Set Top Box

Remote Control Codes

Star 00887

Stream System 01300

Strong 00853, 00879, 01284,

01300, 01409, 01626,

02418

Sunny 01300

Sunstar 00642

Supernova 00887

Supratech 01413

Systec 01334

Sytech 02418

TBoston 01251, 02418

Teac 01251

Technical 01626

Technika 01284

TechniSat 01100, 01195

Technosat 01206

Techwood 01251, 01284, 01626

TELE System 01251, 01409, 01611

Telefonica 02527, 02761

Telestar 01100, 01195, 01251,

01334, 01626

Televes 01300, 01334

Televisa 00887

Tevion 01409

Thomson 00847, 00853, 01175,

01046, 01291, 01662

Tonna 01611

Topfield 01206

Toshiba 01284

Trevi 01251

Triax 00853, 01251, 01291,

01413, 01611, 01626,

01631

Tricolor TV 01176

True Visions 02408

Twinner 01611

Satellite Set Top Box

UBC 00642

UEC 00879, 01356

United 01251, 01626, 02418

Unitymedia 01882

Universum 00173, 01251

Variosat 00173

VEA 02418

Vestel 01251, 01284

Viasat 01195

Vision 01626

Visiosat 01413, 01457

Vitecom 01413

Vivax 02418

Volcasat 02418

Wavelength 01413

Wharfedale 01284

Wisi 00173

Worldsat 01251

Woxter 02418

Xsat 00847, 01323

Xtreme 01300

Yakumo 01413

Yes 00887

Zehnder 01251, 01334, 01413,

01631

Zinwell 02280, 02761

Satellite Set Top Box

@sat 01300

SAT/PVR Combination

@sat 01300

Amstrad 01175, 01662, 01693

Atsat 01300

Bell ExpressVu 00775

British Sky

Broadcasting

01175, 01662

Satellite Set Top Box

BskyB 01175, 01662

Bush 01645

Canal Satellite 02657

Canal+ 02657

CanalSat 02657

Cyfrowy Polsat 02527

Digifusion 01645

DigiQuest 01300

DirecTV 01377, 00099, 20739

Dish Network 00775

Dishpro 00775

Dream Multimedia 01237

Echostar 00775, 02527

Edision 01631

Expressvu 00775

Foxtel 01356

Humax 01176, 01427, 01675,

01808

ID Sat 01334

iNETBOX 01237

Kaon 01300

Kathrein 01561

Maximum 01334

Mediacom 01206

MegaSat 01631

Movistar 02527

Multichoice 02059, 02060

MySky 01356, 01693, 01850

NEOTION 01334

Pace 01175, 01356, 01423,

01662, 01693, 01850,

02059, 02060, 02211,

02657

Panasonic 01304, 03099

Philips 00099

Samsung 01175, 01206, 01662

Sat Control 01300

SAT/PVR Combination

Schneider 01206

Sedea Electronique 01206

SKY 01175, 01662, 01693,

01850, 02754

SKY Deutschland 02754

SKY Italia 01693, 01850

SKY New Zealand 02211

SKY PerfecTV! 02299, 03099

Sky+ 01662

Skyplus 01175, 01334

Smart 01631

Sony 02299

Stream System 01300

Strong 01300

Sunny 01300

TechniSat 01195

Technosat 01206

Telefonica 02527

Telestar 01195

Thomson 01175, 01662

Topfield 01206

Viasat 01195

Xtreme 01300

Television

A.R. Systems 10556, 10037

Accent 10037

Acer 11339

Acoustic Solutions 11037, 11667

Action 10650

Addison 10653

AEG 11037, 11324

Agfaphoto 12719

Aiko 10037

Aim 10037, 10499

SAT/PVR Combination

Remote Control Codes

Akai 10178, 10556, 10037,

10714, 10715, 10208,

11675

Akiba 10037

Akito 10037

Akura 10171, 10037, 10714,

10668, 11037, 11363,

11585, 11667, 11709

Alba 10037, 10714, 10668,

11037, 11585

Alien 11037

Allstar 10037

Amstrad 10171, 10037, 11037

Anam 10037

Anam National 10037, 10650

Andersson 11585

Anitech 10037

Ansonic 10037, 10668

AOC 10178, 10625, 11365

Ardem 10037, 10714

Arena 10037

Aristona 10556, 10037

ART 11037

Art Mito 11585

Asberg 10037

Astra 10037

ATD 10698

Atlantic 10037

Audiosonic 10037, 10714, 10715

Audiovox 11564

Audioworld 10698

Aventura 10171

Axxon 10714

Baird 10208

Bang & Olufsen 10565

Barco 10556

Television

Basic Line 10556, 10037, 10668,

11037

Baur 10037, 10195, 10512

Beaumark 10178

Beijing 10208

Beko 10037, 10714, 10715,

11652

Belson 10698

Belstar 11037

Beon 10037

Berthen 10556, 10668

Bestar 10037

Bexa 12493

Black Diamond 11037

Blaupunkt 10195

Blue Sky 10556, 10037, 10625,

10714, 10668, 11037,

10715, 10499, 11324,

11363, 11652, 11709

Boca 11652

Boman 11324

Bork 11363

BPL 10037, 10208

Brandt 10625, 10714, 10560

Brimax 11709

Brinkmann 10037, 10668

Brionvega 10037

Bush 10556, 10037, 10714,

10668, 11037, 10698,

10208, 11585, 11652,

11667, 12719

Byd:sign 12140, 12209

Camper 10037

Carad 10668, 11037

Carena 10037

Carrefour 10037

Cascade 10037

Television

Casio 10037

Cathay 10037

CCE 10037

Centrum 11037

Centurion 10037

Changhong 10508

Chimei 11666

Clarivox 10037

Classic 10499

Clatronic 10037, 10714, 11324

Clayton 11037

Condor 10037

Conrowa 10698

Contec 10037

Cosmel 10037

CPTEC 10625, 11363

Crown 10037, 10714, 10668,

11037, 10715, 10208,

11652

Cyberpix 11667

D-Vision 10556, 10037

Daewoo 10178, 10556, 10037,

10634, 10499, 12098

Dansai 10037, 10208

Dantax 10714, 11037, 10715,

11652

Datsura 10208

Dawa 10037

Daytron 10037

De Graaf 10208

DEC 11709

Decca 10037

Denver 10037, 11709

Desmet 10037

Diamant 10037

Diamond 10698

Television

Dick Smith

Electronics

10698

Digatron 10037

Digihome 11667

Digiline 10037, 10668

Digitek 11709

Digitor 10037, 10698

Dixi 10037

DL 11363

DMTech 12001

Domeos 10668

Drean 10037

DSE 10698

Dual 10037, 11037, 11585,

11667

Durabrand 10178, 10171, 10714,

11037, 11652

Dux 10037

DX Antenna 11817, 13817

Dynatron 10037

Dynex 12049

e-motion 11709

E:max 11324

Easy Living 11666, 11709

ECE 10037

Elbe 10556, 10037

Electrograph 11755

Element 11886

Elfunk 11037

ELG 10037

Elin 10037

Elite 10037

Emerson 10178, 10171, 10037,

10714, 10668, 11394,

11864, 11886

Envision 11365, 11506

Epson 11379

Television

Remote Control Codes

Erres 10037

ESA 10171

ESC 10037

Euroman 10037

Europa 10037

Europhon 10037

Evesham 11248, 11667

Excello 11037

Exquisit 10037

Ferguson 10037, 10625, 10560,

10195, 11037, 11585

Fidelity 10171, 10037, 10512

Finlandia 10208

Finlux 10556, 10037, 10714,

10715, 11248, 11667

Firstline 10556, 10037, 10714,

10668, 11037, 10208,

11363

Fisher 10208

Flint 10037

Formenti 10037

Fraba 10037

Friac 10037, 10499

Fujicom 11709

Fujitsu 10809

Fujitsu Siemens 10809, 11248, 11666

Funai 10171, 10714, 10668,

11037, 11394, 11666,

11817, 13817

G-Hanz 11363

Gaba 11037

Galaxi 10037

Galaxis 10037

Gateway 11755

GE 10178, 11454, 10625,

10560

GEC 10037

Television

Genesis 10037

Genexxa 10037

GFM 10171, 11864, 11886

Godrej 11585

Goldfunk 10668

GoldStar 10178, 10037, 10714,

10715

Goodmans 10556, 10037, 10625,

10714, 10560, 10668,

10634, 11037, 10499,

11585, 11667

Gorenje 11585

Gradiente 10037

Graetz 10714

Granada 10037, 10560, 10208

Grandin 10556, 10037, 10714,

10668, 11037, 10715,

11652

Grundig 10556, 10037, 10195,

11223, 11667, 12625

GVA 11363, 12098

H & B 12001

Haier 10037, 10698, 10508

Hallmark 10178

Hankook 10178

Hanseatic 10556, 10037, 10625,

10714, 10634, 10499,

12001

Hantarex 10037

Hantor 10037

Harwood 10037

Hauppauge 10037

HB 11324

HCM 10037

Highline 10037

Hinari 10037, 10208

Hisawa 10714

Television

Hisense 10556, 10508, 10208,

11363, 12098

Hitachi 10150, 10178, 10037,

10634, 11037, 10508,

10499, 10578, 11576,

11585, 11643, 11667,

11691, 12433

Hitachi Fujian 10150

Hitec 10698

Hoeher 10714

Hornyphon 10037

Hugoson 11666

Humax 11295

Hypson 10556, 10037, 10714,

10668, 11037, 10715

Hyundai 11037, 10698

Iberia 10037

ICE 10037

iLo 11394

Imperial 10037

Indiana 10037

Ingelen 10714

Inno Hit 11037, 11585

Innova 10037

Insignia 10171, 11423, 11564,

12049

Integra 11807, 13100, 13500

Interbuy 10037

Interfunk 10037, 10512

Internal 10556

Intervision 10037

Irradio 10037

IRT 10698

Isukai 10037

ITS 10037

ITT 10208

ITT Nokia 10208

Television

ITV 10037

JGC 11709

Jinfeng 10208

Jinxing 10556, 10037, 10698

JMB 10556, 10634, 10499

Jubilee 10556

JVC 10650, 10653, 10508,

11428, 11601, 12271

Kaisui 10037

Karcher 10714, 11324

Kathrein 10556

Kendo 10037, 11037, 11585

Kennex 11037

Kioto 10556

Kiton 10037, 10668

KLL 10037

Kneissel 10556, 10037, 10499

Koenig 10037

Kolin 10150, 10037, 11610,

11755

Kolster 10037

Konka 10037, 10714

Korpel 10037

Kosmos 10037

Kunlun 10208

L&S Electronic 10714

Lavic 11363

Lavis 11037

Lecson 10037

Lenco 10037, 11037

Leyco 10037

LG 10178, 10556, 10037,

10714, 10715, 10698,

11423, 11768, 11840,

12182, 12358, 12424,

12834

Liesenkoetter 10037

Television

Remote Control Codes

Lifetec 10037, 10714, 10668,

11037, 12001

Linsar 11585

Local India TV 10208

Local Malaysia TV 10698

Lodos 11037

Loewe 10037, 10512, 11884

Logik 11037, 10698

Logix 10668

Luma 11037

Lumatron 10037, 10668

Lumenio 10037

Lux May 10037

Luxor 11037, 10208

LXI 10178

M Electronic 10037, 10714, 10634,

10195, 10512, 11652

Madison 10037

Magnavox 10171, 11454, 11365,

11506, 11755, 11867,

12372

Magnum 10037, 10714, 10715

Manesth 10037

Manhattan 10037, 10668, 11037

Marantz 11454, 10556, 10037

Mark 10037, 10714, 10715

Master's 10499

Mastro 10698

Masuda 10037

Matsui 10556, 10037, 10714,

10195, 11037, 10208,

11666, 11667

Matsushita 10650

Maxent 11755

Maxess 12493

Meck 10698

Mediator 10556, 10037

Television

Medion 10556, 10037, 10714,

10668, 11037, 10698,

10512, 11248, 11585,

11667, 12001, 12719

Megatron 10178

MEI 11037

Memorex 10150, 10178, 11037

Mercury 10037

Mermaid 10037

Metronic 10625

Metz 10037, 10668, 10195,

11037, 11533

MGA 10150, 10178

Micromaxx 10037, 10714, 10668,

11037, 11324, 12001

Microspot 11614

Mikomi 11037, 11585

Minato 10037

Minerva 10195, 11248

Ministry Of Sound 11667

Minoka 10037

Mirai 11666

Mitsubishi 10150, 11250, 10178,

10556, 10037, 11037,

10512, 11171

Mivar 10609

Moree 10037

Morgan's 10037

Moserbaer 11585

MTC 10512

MTlogic 10714

Mudan 10208

Multitec 10037, 10668, 11037

Multitech 10037

Myrica 11666

Myryad 10556

NAD 10178, 10037

Television

Naiko 10037

Nakimura 10037

National 10508, 10208

NEC 10178, 10653, 10508,

10499

Neckermann 10556, 10037

NEI 10037, 11037

NEO 11324

Netsat 10037

NetTV 11755

Neufunk 10556, 10037, 10714

New Tech 10556, 10037

Newave 10178

Nikkai 10037

Nikkei 10714

Nikko 10178

Nokia 10208

Norcent 11365

Nordmende 10037, 10714, 10560,

10195, 11585, 11667,

12001

Normerel 10037

Nortek 10668

Novatronic 10037

Novita 11585

Nu-Tec 10698

O.K.Line 11037, 11324

Oceanic 10208

Odys 12719

Okano 10037

OKI 11585, 11667

Olevia 11610, 12124

Omni 10698

Onei 11667

Onida 10653

Onimax 10714

Television

Onix 10698

Onkyo 11807, 13100, 13500

Onn 11667, 11709

Onyx 11709

Opera 10037, 10714

Optimus 10650

Orbit 10037

Orion 10556, 10037, 10714,

11037, 12001

Orline 10037

Ormond 10668, 11037

Osaki 10556, 10037

Osio 10037

Osume 10037

Otto Versand 10556, 10037, 10195,

10512

Pacific 10556, 10714, 11037,

11324

Palladium 10556, 10037, 10714

Palsonic 10037, 10698

Panama 10037

Panasonic 11480, 10037, 10650,

10508, 10208, 11636,

12170

Panavision 10037

Panda 10698, 10508, 10208

Pansonic 11636

Penney 10178

Perdio 10037

Perfekt 10037

Petters 10037

Philco 10178, 10171, 10037,

11394

Philips 10178, 10171, 11454,

10556, 10037, 10512,

10605, 10690, 11394,

11506, 11867, 12372

Phocus 10714, 11652

Television

Remote Control Codes

Phoenix 10037

Phonola 10556, 10037

Pioneer 10037, 10698, 10512,

11457, 11636, 12171

Plantron 10037

Playsonic 10037, 10714, 10715,

11652

Powerpoint 10037, 10698

Prinston 11037, 10715

Profitronic 10037

Proline 10037, 10625, 10634,

11037

Prosonic 10037, 10714, 10668,

11324, 11585, 11667,

11709, 12001

Protech 10037, 10668, 11037

Proton 10178

ProVision 10556, 10037, 10714,

11324

Pvision 12001

Pye 10556, 10037

Qingdao 10208

Quasar 10650

Quelle 10037, 10668, 10195,

11037, 10512

R-Line 10037

Radiola 10556, 10037

Radiomarelli 10037

RadioShack 10178, 10037

Radiotone 10037, 10668, 11037

RCA 10178, 11454, 10625,

10560, 10618, 11781,

12247, 12403, 12429,

12434, 12746, 12932

Realistic 10178

Recor 10037

Rectiligne 10037

Redstar 10037

Television

Reflex 10037, 10668, 11037

Relisys 11585

Remotec 10171, 10037

Reoc 10714

Revox 10037

RFT 10037

Roadstar 10037, 10714, 10668,

11037, 10715

Rolson 12001, 12098

Rowa 10037, 10698

Saba 10625, 10714, 10560

Sagem 10618

Saivod 10037, 10668, 11037

Salora 10208, 12001

Sampo 10178, 10171, 10650,

11755

Samsung 10178, 10556, 10037,

10618, 10650, 10208,

12051

Sansui 10171, 10037, 10714,

11248, 12001

Sanyo 11037, 10508, 10208,

11142, 11365, 11585,

11667, 11974

SBR 10556, 10037

Schaub Lorenz 10714, 11324, 11363,

11667, 12001

Schneider 10556, 10037, 10714,

10668, 11037

Schoentech 11037

Scotch 10178

Scott 10178

Sears 10178, 10171

Seaway 10634

Seelver 11037

SEG 10037, 10668, 11037,

12719

SEI 10037

Television

Sei-Sinudyne 10037

Serie Dorada 10178

Shanghai 10208

Sharp 10650, 10818, 11165,

11423, 11659

Shintoshi 10037

Shivaki 10178, 10037

Siam 10037

Siemens 10037, 10195

Siera 10556, 10037

Silva 10037

Silva Schneider 10037

Silver 10715

SilverCrest 11037

Sinudyne 10037

SKY 10037, 11614, 11775

Skyworth 10037, 10698

Sliding 11324

SLX 10668

Solavox 10037

Soniko 10037

Soniq 12493

Sonitron 10208

Sonneclair 10037

Sonoko 10037

Sonolor 10208

Sontec 10037

Sony 10810, 11505, 11167,

11651, 11825

Soundesign 10178

Soundwave 10037, 11037, 10715

Sowa 10178

Squareview 10171

Standard 10037, 11037, 11709

Starlite 10037

Strato 10037

Television

SunBriteTV 11610

Sungoo 11248

Sunny 10037

Sunstar 10037

Sunstech 12001

Sunwood 10037

Supersonic 10208

SuperTech 10556, 10037

Supra 10178

Svasa 10208

Swisstec 11614, 11775

Sylvania 10171, 11394, 11864,

11886

Symphonic 10171, 11394

Synco 10178, 11755

Syntax 11610

Sysline 10037

Tacico 10178

Talent 10178

Tashiko 10650

Tatung 10037, 11248, 11324

TCL 10698, 12403, 12429,

12434, 13183

TCM 10714, 12001

Teac 10178, 10171, 10037,

10714, 10668, 11037,

10698, 10512, 11248,

11363, 11709, 11755

Tec 10037

Tech Line 10037, 10668

Technica 11037

Technics 10556, 10650

Technika 11667

TechniSat 10556

Technisson 10714, 11652

Techno 11585

Television

Remote Control Codes

Technosonic 10556, 10625, 10499,

11324

Techvision 11709

Techwood 11037, 11667

Tecnimagen 10556

Teco 10178, 10653

Tedelex 10208, 11709

Teknika 10150

TELE System 11585

Telecor 10037

Telefunken 10037, 10625, 10714,

10560, 10698, 11585,

11667

Telefusion 10037

Telegazi 10037

Telemeister 10037

Telesonic 10037

Telestar 10556, 10037

Teletech 10037, 10668, 11037

Teleview 10037

Tennessee 10037

Tensai 10037, 11037, 10715

Tesla 10556, 10037, 10714,

11037, 11652

Tevion 10556, 10037, 10714,

10668, 11037, 11248,

11585, 11667

Thomson 10037, 10625, 10560

Thorn 10037, 10499, 10512

Thorn-Ferguson 10499

TMK 10178

Tokai 10037, 10668, 11037

Tokaido 11037

Topline 10668, 11037

Toshiba 10195, 11037, 10618,

10650, 10508, 11169,

11508, 11524, 11652,

12203

Television

Toyoda 11709

TRANS-continents 10556, 10037, 10668,

11037

Transonic 10037, 10698, 10512,

11363

Triad 10556

Trio 11248

Triumph 10556, 10037

TVTEXT 95 10556

Uher 10037

Ultravox 10037

UMC 11614, 11775

Unic Line 10037

Uniden 12122

United 10556, 10037, 10714,

11037, 10715, 11652

Unitek 11709

Universal 10037, 10714

Universum 10037, 10668, 10195,

11037, 10618, 10512

Univox 10037

V7 Videoseven 11666, 11755

Vestel 10037, 10668, 11037,

11585, 11667

Vexa 10037

Victor 10650, 10653, 11428

Videocon 10037, 10508

VideoSystem 10037

Vidtech 10178

Viewsonic 11365, 11564, 11755,

12049

Vision 10037

Vistron 11363

Vivax 11709

Vizio 11758, 12209

Vortec 10037

Voxson 10178, 10037

Television

VU 11365, 12098

Walker 11667

Waltham 10037, 10668, 11037

Wansa 12098

Wards 10178

Watson 10037, 10714, 10668,

11037

Wega 10037

Welltech 10714, 11652

Weltstar 11037

Westinghouse 11755

Wharfedale 10556, 10037, 11324,

11667

White Westinghouse 10037

Wilson 10556

Windsor 10668, 11037

Windy Sam 10556

Wintel 10714

World-of-Vision 12001

Wyse 11365

Xenius 10634

Xiahua 10698

XLogic 10698

Xrypton 10037

Yamaha 10650, 11576

Yamishi 10037

Yokan 10037

Yoko 10037

YU-MA-TU 10037

Zenith 10178, 10037, 11365,

11423, 12358

Zepto 11585

Zonda 10698

VCR

DirecTV 20739

Go Video 20614

Television

Humax 20739

Panasonic 20614, 20616

Philips 20739

ReplayTV 20614, 20616

Sonic Blue 20614, 20616

Sony 20636

TiVo 20636, 20739

PVR

DirecTV 20739

Go Video 20614

Humax 20739

Panasonic 20614, 20616

Philips 20739

ReplayTV 20614, 20616

Sonic Blue 20614, 20616

Sony 20636

TiVo 20636, 20739

TV/VCR Combination

Amstrad 10171

Ferguson 10625

Fidelity 10171

GoldStar 10037

Grundig 10556, 10037, 10195

LG 10178

Mitsubishi 10556

Philips 10556, 10037

Radiola 10556

Saba 10625

Sanyo 11974

Schneider 10556, 10037

Sharp 10818

Siemens 10037

Sony 11505

Teac 10178, 10171

VCR

Remote Control Codes

Technics 10556

Thomson 10625

DVD

3D LAB 30539

Accurian 30675

Acoustic Solutions 30713

AEG 30675

AFK 31152

Aiwa 30533

Akai 30675

Alba 30539, 30713

Ambiance 33052

Amstrad 30713

Anthem 32820

Aristona 30539, 30646

ASDA 32213

Audix 30713

Autovox 30713

Awa 32587

Basic Line 30713

Bel Canto Design 31571

Black Diamond 30713

Blue Parade 30571

Blue Sky 30713

Brandt 30503

Bush 30713

C-Tech 31152

California Audio Labs 30490

Cambridge Audio 32808

Centrum 30675, 30713

Changhong 30627

Cinetec 30713

Clatronic 30675

Clayton 30713

Crown 30713

TV/VCR Combination

Dantax 30539, 30713

Denon 30490, 30634, 31634,

32258, 32748

Dick Smith

Electronics

31152

Digihome 30713

DigiLogic 30713

Digix Media 31394

Disney 30675

DSE 30675, 31152

Dual 30713

Durabrand 30675, 30713

Dynex 32596

Dyon 33052

eBench 31152

Elfunk 30713

Elite 31152

Emerson 30675, 32213

EuroLine 30675

Ferguson 30713

Finlux 30741

Firstline 30713

Foehn & Hirsch 33052

Funai 30675

GE 30522

GFM 30675

Global Sphere 31152

Go Video 30741

GoldStar 30741

Goodmans 30713, 31152

GPX 30741

Grandin 30713

Grundig 30539, 30713

H & B 30713

Haaz 31152

Hanseatic 30741

DVD

Harman/Kardon 30582, 31229, 33228

Henss 30713

Hitachi 30573, 30713, 31664

Hoeher 30713

HotMedia 31152

Humax 30646

Inno Hit 30713

Insignia 30741, 30675, 32428,

32596

Integra 30503, 30571, 30627,

31612, 31634, 32147

Irradio 30646

JVC 30503, 30539, 30623,

30867, 31597, 31602,

32855

Kendo 30713

Kennex 30713

Kenwood 30490, 30534

Lenco 30713, 33052

Lexicon 32545

LG 30741, 31602

Limit 33052

Lodos 30713

Loewe 30539, 30741, 32474,

32783

Logik 30713

Lumatron 30741, 30713

Lunatron 30741

Luxman 30573

Luxor 30713

Magnavox 30503, 30539, 30646,

30675, 30713, 31354

Manhattan 30713

Marantz 30539, 32414, 32432,

33444

Mark 30713

Matsui 30713

DVD

Maxim 30713

MDS 30713

Medion 30630, 30741

Memorex 32213

Metz 30571, 30713

Micromedia 30503, 30539

Micromega 30539

Microsoft 30522, 32083

Minax 30713

Mitsubishi 30713

Momitsu 33052

NAD 30741

NEC 30741, 31602

Onkyo 30503, 30627, 31612,

32147, 30571, 31634

Oppo 30575, 32545

Orion 30713

Ormond 30713

Pacific 30713

Palladium 30713

Panasonic 30503, 30490, 31579,

31641, 32523, 32710,

32859

Pelican Accessories 30533

Philco 30675

Philips 30503, 30539, 30646,

30675, 30713, 31340,

31354, 32056, 32084,

32434, 32689

Pioneer 30571, 30142, 30631,

31571, 32442, 32860

Polk Audio 30539

Presidian 30675

ProAudio 31394

Proscan 30522

Proson 30713

Pye 30539, 30646

DVD

Remote Control Codes

Radionette 30741

Radiotone 30713

RCA 30522, 30571, 32213,

32587

REC 30490

Red 32213

Redstar 31394

Roadstar 30713

Rotel 30623

Salora 30741

Samsung 30490, 30573, 30199,

30820, 31635, 32069,

32329, 32489, 33195

Sanyo 30713

Schneider 30539, 30646, 30713

Schoentech 30713

Scott 31394

SEG 30713

Semp 30503

Sharp 30630, 30675, 30713,

32250, 32474, 32652,

32869

Sherwood 30741, 33052

Shinsonic 30533

Silva Schneider 30741

SilverCrest 31152

Skantic 30539, 30713

SM Electronic 31152

Smart 30713

Sony 30533, 30864, 31033,

31070, 31431, 31516,

31633, 32180

Soundwave 30713

Star Clusters 31152

Strato 31152

Strong 30713

Supervision 31152

DVD

Sylvania 30630, 30675

Symphonic 30675

Tamashi 31394

Tandberg 30713

Targa 30741

Tchibo 30741

TCL 32587

TCM 30741

Teac 30571, 30741, 30675,

31394

Technica 30713

Technics 30490

Techwood 30713

Teletech 30713

Theta Digital 30571

Thomson 30522

Toshiba 30503, 31639, 32277,

32551, 32705, 33157

Transonic 31394

TVE 30713

United 30675, 30713, 31152

Universum 30741, 30713

Urban Concepts 30503

Vestel 30713

Victor 31597

Vizio 32563

Vtrek 32587

Waltham 30713

Wellington 30713

Weltstar 30713

Wharfedale 30713

Windsor 30713

Windy Sam 30573

Xbox 30522, 32083

XLogic 31152

DVD

Yamaha 30490, 30539, 30646,

30817, 31354, 32298,

32299

Zenith 30503, 30741

Blu-ray Disc

Ambiance 33052

Anthem 32820

Cambridge Audio 32808

Denon 32258, 32748

Dyon 33052

Foehn & Hirsch 33052

Funai 30675

Harman/Kardon 33228

Insignia 30675, 32428, 32596

Integra 32147, 32900, 32910,

33100, 33101, 33500,

33501

JVC 32855

Lenco 33052

Lexicon 32545

LG 30741, 31602

Limit 33052

Loewe 32474, 32783

Magnavox 30675

Marantz 32414, 32432, 33444

Momitsu 33052

Onkyo 32147, 32900, 32910,

33100, 33101, 33500,

33501

Oppo 32545

Panasonic 31641, 32523, 32859

Philips 32084, 32434, 32689

Pioneer 30142, 32442

Samsung 30199, 33195

Sharp 32250, 32474, 32652

Sherwood 33052

DVD

Sony 31516, 32180

Sylvania 30675

Toshiba 32551, 32705, 33157

Vizio 32563

Yamaha 32298, 32299

DVD-R

Accurian 30675

Aristona 30646

Denon 30490

Emerson 30675

Funai 30675

Go Video 30741

GPX 30741

Hitachi 31664

Humax 30646

Irradio 30646

JVC 31597

LG 30741

Loewe 30741

Magnavox 30646, 30675

Medion 30741

Panasonic 30490, 31579, 32523,

32710, 32859

Philips 30646, 31340

Pioneer 30631, 32860

Pye 30646

RCA 30522

Samsung 30490, 31635

Schneider 30646

Sharp 30630, 30675, 32869

Sony 31033, 31070, 31431,

31516, 31633, 32180

Sylvania 30675

Targa 30741

Toshiba 31639, 32277, 32551

Blu-ray Disc

Remote Control Codes

Victor 31597

Yamaha 30646

Zenith 30741

HD-DVD

Integra 32901, 33104 33504

LG 30741

Microsoft 32083

Onkyo 32901, 33104 33504

Xbox 32083

TV/DVD Combination

Akai 11675

Black Diamond 11037, 30713

Blue Sky 11037, 30713

Bush 11037, 10698, 12719,

30713

Centrum 11037, 30713

Crown 11037, 30713

DMTech 12001

Dual 11037, 30713

Dynex 12049

Elfunk 11037, 30713

Emerson 11394, 11864, 11886,

30675

Ferguson 11037, 30713

Goodmans 11037, 30713

Grandin 30713

Grundig 30539

H & B 12001

Hanseatic 12001

Hitachi 11037, 11667, 30713

Insignia 12049

JVC 12271

LG 11423

Logik 11037, 30713

Luxor 11037, 30713

DVD-R

Magnavox 12372

Matsui 11037, 30713

Medion 12719

Nordmende 12001

Odys 12719

Panasonic 12170

Philips 11454, 10556, 11394,

30539

Powerpoint 10698

Prosonic 12001

Pvision 12001

RCA 12746, 12932

Schaub Lorenz 12001

SEG 11037, 12719, 30713

Sharp 10818

Soniq 12493

Sunstech 12001

Sylvania 10171, 11394, 11864,

11886, 30630, 30675

Teac 10698

Technica 11037, 30713

Telefunken 10698

Teletech 11037, 30713

Thomson 10625

Toshiba 11524

United 11037, 30713

Universum 30713

Vestel 11037

Viewsonic 12049

Weltstar 11037, 30713

TV/DVD Combination

Remote Control Codes

Memo

SN 29401094

* 2 9 4 0 1 0 9 4 *

Y1112-1

Onkyo Av Receiver Tx Nr818 Users Manual

Onkyo-Tx-Nr818-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-tx-nr818-owner-s-manual

AV Receiver TX-NR818 Manual_TX-NR818_English

TX-NR818 to the manual c3a2c9fb-6e65-4708-8261-f42e3b644448

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation